637774
5
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/326
Next page
HANDBOOK
On-line handbook
If the "MyCITROËN" function is not available on the CITROËN public website for your country,
youcanndyourhandbookatthefollowingaddress:
http://service.citroen.com/ddb/
FindyourhandbookontheCITROËNwebsite,under"MyCITROËN".
Select:
Selectoneofthefollowingmeansofaccessto
viewyourhandbookon-line...
Thispersonalandcustomisablespaceallowsyoutoestablishdirectandspecialcontact
with CITROËN.
thelanguage,
thevehicle,itsbodystyle,
theprinteditionofyourhandbookappropriateforthedateofregistrationofyourvehicle.
Scanthiscodefordirectaccesstoyourhandbook.
Referringtothehandbookon-linealsogivesyou
accesstothelatestinformationavailable,easily
identiedbythebookmark,associatedwiththis
symbol:
Key
safetywarning
additionalinformation
contributestotheprotectionoftheenvironment
CITROËN has a presence on every continent,
acompleteproductrange,
bringingtogethertechnologyandapermanentspiritofinnovation,
foramodernandcreativeapproachtomobility.
Wethankyouandcongratulateyouonyourchoice.
Happymotoring!
At the wheel of your new vehicle,
gettingtoknoweachsystem,
eachcontrol,eachsetting,
makesyourtrips,yourjourneys
morecomfortableandmoreenjoyable.
Thishandbookhasbeendesignedtohelptomakethe
mostofyourC4Cactusinallcircumstancesandin
completesafety.
Takethetimetoreadthroughitsoastofamiliarise
yourselfwithyourvehicle.
Thishandbookcoversallofthevariationsinequipment
availableacrossthewholeC4Cactusrange.
Yourvehiclewillbefittedwithonlysomeofthe
equipmentdescribedinthisdocument,dependingonits
trimlevel,versionandthespecificationforthecountryin
whichitwassold.
Thedescriptionsandillustrationsaregivenasindications
only.
AutomobilesCITROËNreservestherighttomodifythe
technicalcharacteristics,equipmentandaccessories
withouthavingtoupdatethiseditionofthehandbook.
Thisdocumentformsanintegralpartofyourvehicle.
Remembertopassitontothenewownerintheeventof
thesaleofthevehicle.
.
.
Contents
Lightingcontrol 108
Automaticilluminationofheadlamps 112
Daytimerunninglamps/Sidelamps(LEDs) 113
Headlampadjustment 115
Corneringlighting 116
Wipercontrolstalk 117
Automaticrainsensitivewipers 119
Panoramicsunroof 121
Courtesylamp 122
Brightnessofinstrumentsandcontrols 123
Bootlamp 123
Visibility
Instrumentpanel 11
Indicatorandwarninglamps 12
Indicators 24
7-inchtouchscreentablet 28
Tripcomputer 35
Distancerecorders 37
Settingthedateandtime 38
Monitoring
Overview
Remotecontrolkey 39
Centrallocking 44
Doors 45
Boot 47
Frontelectricwindowcontrols 48
Reardoorwindows 49
Access
Frontseats 50
Rearseats 52
Mirrors 54
Steeringwheeladjustment 56
Ventilation 57
Heating 59
Manualairconditioning 61
Automaticairconditioning 63
Frontdemist-defrost 67
Rearscreendemist-defrost 68
Comfort
Interiorttings 69
Bootttings 75
Fittings
Drivingrecommendations 78
Starting-switchingofftheengine 79
Parkingbrake 82
5-speedmanualgearbox 83
Gearefciencyindicator 84
ETGelectronicgearbox 85
Hillstartassist 89
Stop&Start 90
Speedlimiter 93
Cruisecontrol 96
Memorisingspeeds 99
Parkingsensors 100
Reversingcamera 102
ParkAssist 103
Driving
Eco-driving
.
Contents
Directionindicators 124
Hazardwarninglamps 124
Horn 125
Emergencyorassistancecall 125
Under-inationdetection 126
ESCsystem 129
Seatbelts 132
Airbags 135
Safety
Childseats 141
Deactivatingthepassenger'sfrontairbag 144
ISOFIXchildseats 150
i-Sizechildseats 153
Childlock 155
Childsafety
Checks
Fueltank 156
Misfuelprevention(Diesel) 158
Runningoutoffuel(Diesel) 160
AdBlue
®
additiveandSCRsystem
(BlueHDiDiesel) 161
Temporarypuncturerepairkit 169
Changingawheel 176
Snowchains 182
Changingabulb 183
Changingafuse 191
12Vbattery 198
Energyeconomymode 202
Changingawiperblade 203
Towing 204
Towingatrailer 206
Roofbars 208
Verycoldclimatescreens 210
AIRBUMP
®
protectors 211
Accessories 212
Adviceoncareandmaintenance 214
Practicalinformation Technicaldata
Emergencyorassistance 231
7-inchtouchscreentablet 233
Audioandtelematics
Alphabeticalindex
Bonnet 216
Petrolengines 217
Dieselengines 218
Checkinglevels 219
Checks 223
Petrolengines 225
Petrolweights 226
Dieselengines 227
Dieselweights 228
Dimensions 229
Identicationmarkings 230
4
Overview
Remotecontrolkey 39-43
- locking/unlockingthevehicle
- locatingthevehicle
- anti-theftprotection
- battery
Exterior
Doormirrors 54
Lightingcontrolstalk 108-114
Guide-me-homelighting 114
Daytimerunninglamps 113
Headlampbeamadjustment 115
Corneringlighting 116
Changingbulbs 183-187
- frontlamps
- foglamps
- directionindicatorrepeaters
Doors 45-46
- opening/closing
- emergencycontrol
Centrallocking 44
Deadlocking 41
Glasspanoramicsunroof 121
Roofbars 208-209
Accessories 212-213
Wipercontrolstalk 117-120
Changingawiperblade 120,203
Boot 47
- opening/closing
- emergencyrelease
ParkAssist 103-107
Reversingcamera 102
Parkingsensors 100-101
Towbar 206-207
Towing 204-205
Changingbulbs 188-189
- rearlamps
- 3
rd
brakelamp
- numberplatelamps
Fueltank,misfuelprevention
(Diesel) 156-159
Runningoutoffuel(Diesel) 160
Electronicstabilityprogramme 129
ESC:ABS,EBFD,ASR,DSC 129-131
Under-inflationdetection 126-128
Tyrepressures 230
Temporarypuncturerepairkit 169-175
Changingawheel 176-181
- tools
- removing/refitting
Snowchains 182
AIRBUMP
®
protectors 211
5
.
Overview
Bootfittings 75-76
- rearparcelshelf
- hook
- storagewell
- luggagenet(accessory)
- luggagenetsecuringrings
Bootlamp 123
Warningtriangle 77
AdBlue
®
tank 161-168
Interior
Reardoorwindows 49
Electricchildlock 155
Rearseats 52-53
Airbags 135-140
Frontelectricwindows 48
Deactivatingthepassenger'sfront
airbag 136,143-146
Seatbelts 132-134
Childseats 141-149,154
ISOFIXchildseats 150-152
i-Sizechildseats 153
Frontseats 50-51
Interiorfittings 69-73
- sunvisor
- glovebox
- 12Vaccessorysocket
- USBport(s)/Auxiliarysocket
- frontarmrest
- coathooks
Mats 74
6
Overview
Instrumentsand
controls
Doormirrors 54
Frontelectricwindows 48
Openingthebonnet 216
Touchscreentablet 28-34,233-303
Settingthedate/time 38
Brightnessofinstruments 123
Heating,ventilation 57-60
Manualairconditioning 61-62
Automaticairconditioning 63-66
5-speedmanualgearbox 83
Gear efficiency
indicator 84
Electronicgearbox 85-88
Hillstartassist 89
Stop&Start 90-92
Glovebox 69-71
USBport(s) 69-70,72,250,253
Auxiliarysocket 69-70,72,254
Courtesylamp 122
Rearviewmirror 55
Emergencyor
assistancecall 125,231
Parkingbrake 82
12Vaccessorysocket 69-71
USBport(s)/
Auxiliarysocket 69-70,72,250,253
Dashboardfuses 191-195
7
.
Overview
Headlampbeamadjustment 115
Lightingcontrolstalk 108-114
Automaticilluminationofheadlamps 112
Directionindicators 124
Electronicgearbox 85-88
Wipercontrolstalk 117-120
Tripcomputer 35-36
Speedlimiter 93-95
Cruisecontrol 96-98
Memorisingspeeds 99
Frontdemist/defrost 67
Rearscreendemist/defrost 68
Centrallocking 44
ParkAssist 103-107
ESC 129-131
Hazardwarninglamps 124
Instrumentpanels 11
Warninglamps 12-23
Serviceindicator 24-26
Engineoillevelindicator 27
Gearefficiencyindicator 84
Distancerecorders 37
Steeringwheeladjustment 56
Horn 125
Instrumentsandcontrols(cont.)
Starting-switchingofftheengine 79-81
8
Overview
Runningoutoffuel,Diesel 160
AdBlue
®
additiveandSCRsystem
(BlueHDiDiesel) 161-168
Maintenance-Technicaldata
Checkinglevels 219-222
- oil
- brakefluid
- coolant
- screenwashfluid
- additive(Dieselwithparticlefilter)
Checkingcomponents 223-224
- battery
- air/passengercompartmentfilter
- oilfilter
- particlefilter(Diesel)
- brakepads/discs
Changingbulbs 183-190
- frontlamps
- rearlamps
- interiorlighting
Dimensions 229
Identificationmarkings 230
Petrolweights 226
Dieselweights 228
Openingthebonnet 219
Underthebonnet,petrol 217
Underthebonnet,Diesel 218
Petrolengines 225
Dieselengines 227
12Vbattery 198-201
Loadreduction,economymode 202
Enginecompartment
fuses 191-192,196-197
9
.Eco-driving
Optimise the use of your gearbox
Withamanualgearbox,moveoffgentlyandchangeupwithoutwaiting.
Duringaccelerationchangeupearly.
Thegearefficiencyindicatorinvitesyouengagethemostsuitablegear:
assoonastheindicationisdisplayedintheinstrumentpanel,followit
straightaway.
Control the use of your electrical
equipment
Beforemovingoff,ifthepassengercompartmentistoowarm,ventilateit
byopeningthewindowsandairventsbeforeusingtheairconditioning.
Above30mph(50km/h),closethewindowsandleavetheairvents
open.
Remembertomakeuseofequipmentthatcanhelpkeepthe
temperatureinthepassengercompartmentdown(sunroofandwindow
blinds...).
Tosaveenergy,donotsettheairconditioningattoolowatemperature.
Assoonasthedesiredtemperaturehasbeenreached,limittheuseof
theairconditioning,exceptifregulationisautomatic.
Switchoffthedemistinganddefrostingcontrolsassoonasyouconsider
possible.
Switchofftheheatedseatassoonaspossible.
Switchofftheheadlampsandfoglampwhentheleveloflightdoesnot
requiretheiruse.
Avoidrunningtheenginebeforemovingoff,particularlyinwinter;your
vehiclewillwarmupmuchfasterwhiledriving.
Asapassenger,ifyouavoidconnectingyourmultimediadevices
(film,music,videogame...),youwillcontributetowardslimitingthe
consumptionofelectricalenergy,andsooffuel.
Disconnectyourportabledevicesbeforeleavingthevehicle.
Eco-driving
Eco-drivingisarangeofeverydaypracticesthatallowthemotoristtooptimisetheirfuelconsumptionandCO
2
emissions.
Withanelectronicgearbox,donotpresstheacceleratorpedalheavily
orsuddenly.
Drive smoothly
Maintainasafedistancebetweenvehicles,useenginebrakingrather
thanthebrakepedal,andpresstheacceleratorprogressively.These
practicescontributetowardsareductioninfuelconsumptionandCO
2
emissionsandalsohelpreducethebackgroundtrafficnoise.
Ifyourvehiclehascruisecontrol,makeuseofthesystematspeeds
above25mph(40km/h)whenthetrafficisflowingwell.
10
Eco-driving
Limit the causes of excess consumption
Spreadloadsthroughoutthevehicle;placetheheaviestitemsinthe
bottomoftheboot,ascloseaspossibletotherearseats.
Limittheloadscarriedinthevehicleandreducewindresistance(roof
bars,roofrack,bicyclecarrier,trailer...).Usearoofboxinpreference.
Removeroofbarsandroofracksafteruse.
Attheendofwinter,removesnowtyresandrefityoursummertyres.
Observe the recommendations
on maintenance
Checkthetyrepressuresregularly,whencold,referringtothelabelin
thedooraperture,driver'sside.
Carryoutthischeckinparticular:
- beforealongjourney,
- ateachchangeofseason,
- afteralongperiodoutofuse.
Don'tforgetthesparewheelandthetyresonanytrailerorcaravan.
Haveyourvehicleservicedregularly(engineoil,oilfilter,airfilter,
passengercompartmentfilter...)andobservethescheduleof
operationsrecommendedinthemaintenanceandwarrantyguide.
Whenrefuelling,donotcontinueafterthethirdcut-offofthenozzleto
avoidanyoverflow.
Atthewheelofyournewvehicle,itisonlyafterthefirst1800miles
(3000kilometres)thatyouwillseethefuelconsumptionsettledownto
aconsistentaverage.
11
1
Monitoring
Instrumentpanel
1. Serviceindicator,thentotaldistance
recorder(milesorkm).
Thesefunctionsaredisplayedinturnwhen
theignitionisswitchedon.
2. Cruisecontrolorspeedlimitersettings.
3. Digitalspeedometer(mphorkm/h).
4. Informationrelatedtotheelectronic
gearbox.
Display screens
5. Gearefficiencyindicator.
6. Engineoillevelindicator.
7. Fuelgauge.
12
Monitoring
Indicatorandwarninglamps
Certainwarninglampsmaycomeonin
oneoftwomodes:fixed(continuous)or
flashing.
Onlybyrelatingthetypeofillumination
to the operation of the vehicle can it
bedeterminedwhetherthesituationis
normalorafaulthasoccurred.Inthe
eventofafault,theilluminationofthe
warninglampmaybeaccompaniedby
amessage.
Refertothetablesinthefollowing
pagesformoreinformation.
Visualindicatorsinformingthedriverthatasystemisinoperation,switchedofforhasafault.
When the ignition is switched on
Certainwarninglampscomeonforafew
secondsintheinstrumentpanelwhenthe
vehicle'signitionisswitchedon.
Whentheengineisstarted,thesesame
warninglampsshouldgooff.
Iftheyremainon,beforemovingoff,refertothe
sectiononthewarninglampconcerned.
Associated warnings
Theswitchingonofcertainwarninglampsmay
beaccompaniedbyanaudiblesignalanda
message.
Thewarninglampsmaycomeoncontinuously
(fixed)orflash.
Whenswitchingontheignition,the
displaysintheinstrumentpanelappear
dynamicallyandprogressively.Thisis
normaloperation.
13
1
Monitoring
Operation indicator lamps
Ifoneofthefollowingindicatorlampscomeson,thisconfirmsthatthecorrespondingsystemhascomeintooperation.
Itmaybeaccompaniedbyanaudiblesignalandamessageinthescreen.
Left-hand
direction indicator
flashingwithbuzzer. Thelightingstalkispusheddown.
Right-hand
direction indicator
flashingwithbuzzer. Thelightingstalkispushedup.
Sidelamps fixed. Thelightingstalkisinthe
"Sidelamps"position.
Dipped beam
headlamps
fixed. Thelightingstalkisinthe"Dipped
beamheadlamps"position.
Main beam
headlamps
fixed. Thelightingstalkispulledtowards
you.
Pullthestalktoreturntodippedbeamheadlamps.
Front foglamps fixed. Thefrontfoglampsareswitchedon
usingtheringonthelightingcontrol
stalk.
Turntheringonthelightingcontrolstalkrearward
twicetoswitchoffthefrontfoglamps.
Formoreinformationonthelightingcontrols,refertothecorrespondingsection.
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations
14
Monitoring
Rear foglamp fixed. Therearfoglampisswitchedon
usingtheringonthelightingcontrol
stalk.
Turntheringonthelightingcontrolstalktotherearto
switchofftherearfoglamp.
Diesel engine
pre-heating
fixed. Thekeyisatposition2(ignitionon)in
theignitionswitch.
Waituntilthewarninglampgoesoffbeforestarting.
Theperiodofilluminationofthewarninglampis
determinedbytheclimaticconditions(uptoabout
thirtysecondsinextremeclimaticconditions).
Iftheenginedoesnotstart,switchtheignitionoffand
thenon,waituntilthewarninglampgoesoffagain,
thenstarttheengine.
Parking brake fixed. Theparkingbrakeisappliedornot
properlyreleased.
Releasetheparkingbraketoswitchoffthewarning
lamp,keepingyourfootonthebrakepedal.
Observethesafetyrecommendations.
Formoreinformationontheparkingbrake,refertothe
correspondingsection.
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations
15
1
Monitoring
Automatic
wiping
fixed. Thewipercontrolispushed
downwards.
Automaticfrontwipingisactivated.
Todeactivateautomaticwiping,operatethecontrol
stalkdownwardsorputthestalkintoanotherposition.
Stop & Start fixed. Whenthevehiclestops(redlights,
trafficjams,...)theStop&Startsystem
hasputtheengineintoSTOPmode.
Thewarninglampgoesoffandtheenginerestarts
automaticallyinSTARTmode,assoonasyouwantto
moveoff.
flashes for a
fewseconds,then
goesoff.
STOPmodeistemporarily
unavailable.
or
STARTmodeisinvoked
automatically.
FormoreinformationonspecialcaseswithSTOP
modeandSTARTmode,refertothe"Stop&Start"
section.
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations
Passenger's
front airbag
fixed. Thecontrolswitch,locatedinthe
glovebox,isinthe"ON"position.
Thepassenger'sfrontairbagis
activated.
Inthiscase,donotinstallarearward
facingchildseat.
Turn the control switch to the "OFF" position to
deactivatethefrontpassenger'sairbag.
Youcaninstallarearwardfacingchildseat,unless
thereisanairbagfault(Airbagwarninglampon).
16
Monitoring
Passenger's
front airbag
fixed. Thecontrolswitch,locatedinthe
glovebox,issettotheOFFposition.
Thepassenger'sfrontairbagis
deactivated.
Youcaninstallthechildseat
rearwardfacing,unlessthereisan
airbagfault(Airbagwarninglampon).
Set the control to the "ON" position to activate the
passenger'sfrontairbag.
Inthiscase,donotfitachildseatintherearward
facingposition.
Dynamic
stability control
(DSC/ASR)
fixed. Thebuttonispressedandthe
indicatorlampcomeson.
TheDSC/ASRisdeactivated.
DSC:dynamicstabilitycontrol.
ASR:anti-slipregulation.
PressthebuttontoactivatetheDSC/ASR.Its
indicatorlampgoesoff.
TheDSC/ASRsystemisactivatedautomaticallywhen
thevehicleisstarted.
Ifdeactivated,thesystemisreactivatedautomatically
fromaround30mph(50km/h).
FormoreinformationonDSC/ASR,refertothe
correspondingsection.
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations
Deactivation indicator lamps
Ifoneofthefollowingindicatorlampscomeson,thisconfirmsthatthecorrespondingsystemhasbeenswitchedoffintentionally.
Thisismaybeaccompaniedbyanaudiblesignalandthedisplayofamessage.
17
1
Monitoring
Warning lamps
Whentheengineisrunningorthevehicleisbeingdriven,illuminationofoneofthefollowingwarninglampsindicatesafaultwhichrequiresactionon
thepartofthedriver.
Anyfaultresultingintheilluminationofawarninglampmustbeinvestigatedfurtherusingtheassociatedmessage.
Ifyouencounteranyproblems,contactaCITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
STOP fixed,associatedwith
anotherwarninglamp,
accompaniedbyan
audiblesignaland
amessage.
Illuminationofthiswarninglampis
relatedtoaseriousfaultdetected
withthebrakingorpowersteering
systems,theelectricalsystem,or
withenginelubricationorcoolingor
apuncture.
Stopassoonasitissafetodosoastheenginemay
cutout.
Park,switchofftheignitionandcallaCITROËN
dealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations
Service ontemporarily,
accompaniedby
amessage.
Oneormoreminorfaultsforwhich
thereisnospecificwarninglamp
havebeendetected.
Identifythecauseofthefaultusingthemessage
displayedinthescreen.
Youcandealwithsomeproblemsyourself,suchasa
dooropenorthestartofsaturationoftheparticlefilter
(assoonasthetrafficconditionsallow,regenerate
thefilterbydrivingataspeedofatleast40mph
(60km/h),untilthewarninglampgoesoff).
Foranyotherproblems,suchasafaultwiththetyre
underinflationdetectionsystem,contactaCITROËN
dealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
fixed,accompaniedby
amessage.
Oneormoremajorfaultsforwhich
thereisnospecificwarninglamp
havebeendetected.
Identifythecauseofthefaultusingthemessage
displayedinthescreen;youmustthencontact
aCITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
fixed,associatedwiththe
flashingandthenfixed
displayoftheservice
indicatorspanner.
Theservicingintervalhasbeen
exceeded.
OnlyonBlueHDiDieselversions.
Yourvehiclemustbeservicedassoonaspossible.
18
Monitoring
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations
Engine
autodiagnosis
system
flashing. Theenginemanagementsystemhas
afault.
Riskofdestructionofthecatalyticconverter.
HaveitcheckedbyaCITROËNdealeroraqualified
workshop.
fixed. Theemissioncontrolsystemhas
afault.
Thewarninglampshouldgooffwhentheengineisstarted.
Ifitdoesnotgooff,contactaCITROËNdealerorqualified
workshopwithoutdelay.
Anti-lock
Braking System
(ABS)
fixed. Theanti-lockbrakingsystemhasa
fault.
Thevehicleretainsconventionalbraking.
Drivecarefullyatreducedspeedandcontacta
CITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshopwithout
delay.
Dynamic
stability control
(DSC/ASR)
flashing. TheDSC/ASRregulationis
operating.
Thesystemoptimisestractionandimprovesthe
directionalstabilityofthevehicleintheeventoflossof
griportrajectory.
fixed. TheDSC/ASRsystemhasafault. HaveitcheckedbyaCITROËNdealeroraqualified
workshop.
Braking fixed. Thebrakefluidlevelhasdropped
significantly.
Youmuststopassoonasitissafetodoso.
TopupwithbrakefluidlistedbyCITROËN.
Iftheproblempersists,havethesystemcheckedbya
CITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
+ fixed,associated
withtheABSwarning
lamp.
Theelectronicbrakeforcedistribution
(EBFD)systemhasafault.
Youmuststopassoonasitissafetodoso.
HaveitcheckedbyaCITROËNdealeroraqualified
workshop.
19
1
Monitoring
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations
AdBlue
®
additive
(BlueHDi Diesel)
fixed,onswitching
ontheignition,
accompaniedbyan
audiblesignalanda
messageindicatingthe
remainingdrivingrange.
Theremainingdrivingrangeis
between350miles(600km)and
1500miles(2400km).
HavetheAdBlue
®
additivetanktoppedupassoon
aspossible:gotoaCITRNdealeroraqualified
workshop,orcarryoutthisoperationyourselfby
referringtothecorrespondingsection.
+ flashingassociatedwith
theSERVICEwarning
lamp,accompaniedby
anaudiblesignalanda
messageindicatingthe
remainingdrivingrange.
Theremainingdrivingrangeis
between0and375miles(600km).
Youmusttop-up theAdBlue
®
additivetanktoavoid
a breakdown:gotoaCITROËNdealeroraqualified
workshop,orcarryoutthisoperationyourselfby
referringtothecorrespondingsection.
flashing,associated
withtheSERVICE
warninglamp,
accompaniedbyan
audiblesignalanda
messageindicatingthat
startingisprevented.
TheAdBlue
®
tankisempty:the
startinginhibitionsystemrequired
bylegislationpreventsstartingofthe
engine.
Tobeabletostarttheengine,youmusttop-up the
AdBlue
®
additivetank:gotoaCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshop,orcarryoutthisoperationyourself
byreferringtothecorrespondingsection.
It is essentialtoaddatleast3.8litresofAdBlue
®
to
theadditivetank.
20
Monitoring
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations
+
+
SCR emissions
control system
(BlueHDi Diesel)
fixed,onswitching
ontheignition,
associatedwiththe
SERVICEandengine
diagnosticwarning
lamps,accompanied
byanaudiblesignal
andamessage.
AfaultwiththeSCRemissions
controlsystemhasbeendetected.
Thisalertdisappearsoncetheexhaustemissions
returntonormallevels.
flashing,onswitching
ontheignition,
associatedwiththe
SERVICEandengine
diagnosticwarning
lamps,accompaniedby
anaudiblesignaland
amessageindicating
theremainingdriving
range.
Afterconfirmationofthefaultwiththe
emissionscontrolsystem,youcan
driveforupto650miles(1100km)
beforetheenginestartinginhibition
systemistriggered.
ContactaCITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshop
without delay, to avoid a breakdown.
flashing,onswitching
ontheignition,
associatedwiththe
SERVICEandengine
diagnosticwarning
lamps,accompanied
byanaudiblesignal
andamessage.
Youhaveexceededtheauthorised
drivinglimitfollowingconfirmation
ofafaultwiththeemissionscontrol
system:theenginestartinginhibition
systempreventsstartingofthe
engine.
Tobeabletostarttheengine,youmust call on
aCITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
21
1
Monitoring
Low fuel level fixed,accompaniedby
anaudiblesignaland
amessage.
Whenitfirstcomesonthereremains
approximately 5 litres of fuel in the
tank.
Youarethenusingthefuelreserve.
Youmustrefuelassoonaspossibletoavoidrunning
outoffuel.
Untilsufficientfuelisadded,thiswarninglampwill
comeoneverytimetheignitionisswitchedon,
accompaniedbyanaudiblesignalandamessage.
Thisaudiblesignalandmessagearerepeatedwith
increasingfrequencyasthedropstowards"0".
Fueltankcapacity:
- Petrol:approximately50litres.
- Diesel:approximately45or50litres(depending
onversion).
Nevercontinuetodriveuntilyourunoutoffuelas
thiscoulddamagetheemissioncontrolandinjection
systems.
Seat belt(s)
not fastened /
unfastened
fixed
orflashing
accompaniedbyan
audiblesignal.
Aseatbelthasnotbeenfastenedor
hasbeenunfastened.
Pullthestraptheninsertthetongueinthebuckle.
Airbags ontemporarily. Thislampcomesonforafew
secondswhenyouturnonthe
ignition,thengoesoff.
Thislampshouldgooffwhentheengineisstarted.
Ifitdoesnotgooff,contactaCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshop.
fixed. Oneoftheairbagorseatbelt
pretensionersystemshasafault.
HaveitcheckedbyaCITROËNdealeroraqualified
workshop.
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations
22
Monitoring
Engine oil
pressure
fixed. Thereisafaultwiththeengine
lubricationsystem.
Youmuststopassoonitissafetodoso.
Park,switchofftheignitionandcontactaCITROËN
dealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
Battery charge fixed. Thebatterychargingcircuithasa
fault(dirtyorlooseterminals,slackor
cutalternatorbelt,...).
Thewarninglampshouldgooffwhentheengineis
started.
Ifitdoesnotgooff,contactaCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshop.
Maximum
coolant
temperature
fixed. Thetemperatureofthecooling
systemistoohigh.
Stopassoonasitissafetodoso.
Waituntiltheenginehascooleddownbeforetopping
upthelevel,ifnecessary.
Iftheproblempersists,contactaCITROËNdealeror
qualifiedworkshop.
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations
23
1
Monitoring
Under-inflation fixed,accompaniedby
anaudiblesignaland
amessage.
Thepressureinoneormoretyresis
toolow.
Checkthetyrepressuresassoonaspossible.
Thischeckshouldpreferablybecarriedoutwhenthe
tyresarecold.
Youmustreinitialisethesystemaftertheadjustment
ofoneormoretyrepressuresandafterchangingone
ormorewheels.
Formoreinformation,refertothe"Under-inflation
detection"section.
+ flashingthenfixed,
accompaniedbythe
Servicewarninglamp.
Thesystemhasfault:thetyre
pressuresarenolongermonitored.
Checkthetyrepressuresassoonaspossible.
HavethesystemcheckedbyaCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshop.
Foot on the
brake pedal
flashing,accompanied
byanaudiblesignal
andamessage,and
associatedwiththe
"Footonthebrake"
warningflashinginthe
control panel for the
electronicgearbox.
Thebrakepedalisnotpressedwhen
startingtheengine,withanelectronic
gearbox.
Withanelectronicgearbox,pressthebrakepedalto
starttheengine.
Ifyouwishtoreleasetheparkingbrakewithout
pressingthebrakepedal,thiswarninglampwill
remainon.
flashing. Withanelectronicgearbox,ifyou
holdthevehicleonaninclineusing
theacceleratorfortoolong,the
clutchoverheats.
Usethebrakepedaland/ortheparkingbrake.
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations
24
Monitoring
Service indicator
Systemwhichinformsthedriverwhenthe
nextserviceisdue,inaccordancewiththe
manufacturer'sservicingschedule.
More than 1 800 miles (3 000 km)
remain before the next service is due
Whentheignitionisswitchedon,noservice
informationappearsinthescreen.
Between 600 miles (1 000 km)
and 1 800 miles (3 000 km) remain
before the next service is due
For5secondsaftertheignitionisswitchedon,the
spannersymbolisingtheserviceoperationscomes
on.Thedistancerecorderdisplaylineindicatesthe
distanceremainingbeforethenextserviceisdue.
Example:1700miles(2800km)remainbefore
thenextserviceisdue.
For5secondsaftertheignitionisswitchedon,the
screenindicates:
5secondsaftertheignitionisswitchedon,
the spanner goes off;thedistancerecorder
resumesitsnormaloperation.Thescreenthen
indicatesthetotaldistance.
Indicators
Thepointatwhichthenextserviceisdueis
calculatedfromthelastindicatorzeroreset,
dependingonthedistancetravelledandthe
timeelapsedsincethelastservice.
For BlueHDi Diesel versions, the
degreeofdeteriorationoftheengineoil
isalsotakenintoaccount(depending
onthecountryofsale).
25
1
Monitoring
Service overdue
For5secondsaftertheignitionisswitchedon,the
spanner flashestoindicatethattheservicemust
becarriedoutassoonaspossible.
Example:theserviceisoverdueby180miles
(300km).
For5secondsaftertheignitionisswitchedon,the
screenindicates:
For BlueHDi Diesel versions, this alert
mayalsobeaccompaniedbythefixed
illuminationoftheservicewarninglamp
whentheignitionison.
5secondsaftertheignitionisswitchedon,
thedistancerecorderresumesitsnormal
operation.The spanner remains on.
Thedistanceremainingmaybe
weightedbythetimefactor,depending
onthedrivingconditions.
Therefore,thespannermayalsocome
onifyouhaveexceededtheperiod
sincethelastservice,indicatedinthe
manufacturer'sserviceschedule.
Less than 600 miles (1 000 km)
remain before the next service is due
Example:560miles(900km)remainbefore
thenextserviceisdue.
For5secondsaftertheignitionisswitchedon,
thescreenindicates:
5secondsaftertheignitionisswitchedon,
thedistancerecorderresumesitsnormal
operation.The spanner remains on to
indicatethataservicemustbecarriedout
soon.
For BlueHDi Diesel versions, the
spannermayalsobebroughtonearlier
thanexpected,dependingonthe
degreeofdeteriorationoftheengineoil
(dependingonthecountryofsale).
Therateofdeteriorationoftheengine
oildependsonthedrivingconditionsin
whichthevehicleisused.
26
Monitoring
Service indicator zero reset
Aftereachservice,theserviceindicatormust
beresettozero.
Ifyouhavecarriedouttheserviceonyour
vehicleyourself:
F switchofftheignition,
F pressandholdthebuttonontheendofthe
lightingcontrolstalk,
F switchontheignition;thedistancerecorder
displaybeginsacountdown,
F whenthedisplayindicates"=0", release
thebutton;thespannerdisappears.
Followingthisoperation,ifyouwishto
disconnectthebattery,lockthevehicle
andwaitatleastfiveminutesforthe
zeroresettobetakenintoaccount.
Retrieving the service
information
Youcanaccesstheserviceinformationatany
timeinthetouchscreentablet.
F Select the "Driving assistance"
menu.
F Inthesecondarypage,select
"Diagnostic".
Theservicinginformationisdisplayedin
thescreen.
27
1
Monitoring
Engine oil level indicator*
Onversionsfittedwithanelectricoillevel
indicator,thestateoftheengineoillevelis
displayedintheinstrumentpanelforafew
seconds,aftertheservicinginformation.
Thelevelreadwillonlybecorrectif
thevehicleisonlevelgroundandthe
enginehasbeenoffformorethan
30minutes.
Oil level correct
Oil level incorrect
Thisisindicatedbythedisplayofthemessage
"Oillevelincorrect"intheinstrumentpanel
screen,accompaniedbytheservicewarning
lampandanaudiblesignal.
Ifthelowoillevelisconfirmedbyacheckusing
thedipstick,thelevelmustbetoppedupto
avoiddamagetotheengine.
Oil level indicator fault
Thisissignalledbythedisplayofthemessage
"Oillevelmeasurementinvalid"inthe
instrumentpanel.
ContactaCITROËNdealeroraqualified
workshop.
Refertothe"Checkinglevels"section.
*Dependingonversion.
Intheeventofafaultwiththeelectricindicator,
theoillevelisnolongermonitored.
Ifthesystemisfaulty,youmustcheckthe
engineoillevelusingthemanualdipstick
locatedunderthebonnet.
Refertothe"Checkinglevels"section.
28
Monitoring
7-inchtouchscreentablet
Thetouchscreentabletgivesaccessto:
- theheating/airconditioningcontrols,
- thetripcomputerforsettingsforcertain
vehicle functions,
- audiosystemandtelephonecontrols,
- interactivehelp,soundsettingsandthe
brightnessofinstrumentsandcontrols,
and,dependingonequipment:
- thecontrolsforthenavigationsystemand
connectedservices.
For reasons of safety, the driver
should only carry out operations
that require close attention, with the
vehicle stationary.
Somefunctionsarenotaccessible
whendriving.
General operation
Recommendations
Itisnecessarytopressfirmly,particularlyfor
"flick"gestures(scrollingthroughlists,moving
themap...).
Alightwipeisnotenough.
Thetabletdoesnotrecognisepressingwith
morethanonefinger.
Thistechnologyallowsuseatalltemperatures
andwhenwearinggloves.
Donotusepointedobjectsonthetouchscreen
tablet.
Donottouchthetabletscreenwithwethands.
Uses a soft clean cloth to clean the tablet touch
screen.
Usethisbuttontogotothe
secondarypage.
Use this button to return to the
primarypage.
Use this button for access to
additionalinformationandtothe
settingsforcertainfunctions.
Usethisbuttontoconfirmandsave
thechanges.
Usethisbuttontoquit.
Principles
Usethebuttonsoneithersideofthescreen
foraccesstothemenus,thenpressthevirtual
buttonsinthetouchscreen.
Eachmenuisdisplayedoveroneortwopages
(primarypageandsecondarypage).
Afterafewmomentswithnoactionon
thesecondarypage,theprimarypage
isdisplayedautomatically.
Inveryhotconditions,thesystemmay
gointostandby(displayandsoundoff)
foraminimumperiodof5minutes.
State of indicator lamps
Somebuttonscontainanindicatorlampthat
givesthestateofthecorrespondingfunction.
Greenindicator:youhaveswitchedonthe
correspondingfunction.
Orangeindicator:youhaveswitchedoffthe
correspondingfunction.
29
1
Monitoring
*Dependingonequipment.
"Air conditioning"
allowscontrolofthesettingsfor
temperatureandairflow.
"Driving assistance"
allowsaccesstothetripcomputer
andcertainvehiclefunctionstobe
activated,deactivatedandadjusted.
"Media"
allowsselectionofaradiostation,
thevariousmusicsourcesandthe
displayofphotographs.
"Navigation"*
allowssettingsfornavigationandthe
choiceofadestination.
"Configuration"
allowssoundsettingsandthe
brightnessofinstrumentsand
controlstobeadjustedandgives
access to the interactive help for the
mainvehiclesystemsandwarning
lamps.
"Connected services"*
allows connection to an applications
portaltofacilitate,makesafeand
personalisejourneysbymeans
ofaconnectionkeyavailableon
subscriptionfromaCITROËNdealer.
"Telephone"
allowstheconnectionofamobile
telephoneviaBluetooth.
Touch screen tablet menus
For the Air conditioningmenu,referto
the"Comfort"section.
For the Media, Navigation, Connected
ServicesandTelephonemenus,refer
tothe"Audioandtelematics"section.
30
Monitoring
State of adjustable systems
Operating fault
In the event of a fault with one of these
systems,theindicatorlampintheactivation/
deactivationbuttonflashesforafewmoments.
Analertsymbolisdisplayedtotherightofthe
buttonsymbol,then,inthecaseofsystemsthat
areactivatedbydefault,theorangeindicator
comesonpermanently.
Everytimethebuttonispressed,theindicator
flashesforafewmoments.
Example:
● Functionnotactivated.
● Operatingfaultalert.
then
"Driving assistance" menu
Somesystemshaveadedicatedbutton,to
whichisassociatedanindicatorlamp.
Illuminationofthislampindicateswhetherthe
systemisactivatedordeactivatedcomparedto
thedefault(factory)setting.
Greenindicator:youhaveswitchedonthe
correspondingsystem.
Orangeindicator:youhaveswitchedoffthe
correspondingsystem.
31
1
Monitoring
Thefunctionswithsettingsthatcanbeadjustedaredetailedinthefollowingtable.
Button Corresponding function Comments Activated Deactivated
Park Assist Activation/Deactivationofthefunction.
Stop & Start Activation/Deactivationofthefunction.
Parking sensors Activation/Deactivationofthefunction.
Speed settings Memorisationofspeedsforusewiththespeed
limiterorcruisecontrol.
Under-inflation initialisation Reinitialisationoftheunder-inflationdetection
system.
32
Monitoring
Button Corresponding function Comments
Diagnostic Listofcurrentalerts,servicinginformation.
Vehicle settings Accesstootherfunctionswithsettingsthatcanbeadjusted.Thefunctionsaregrouped
togetherunderthreetabs:
- "Driving assistance"
● "Automaticrearwiperinreverse":activation/deactivationofrearwiperlinkedtoreverse
gear.
Seethe"Visibility"section.
- "Lighting"
● "Guide-me-homelighting":activation/deactivationanddurationoftheautomaticguide-
me-homelighting.
Seethe"Visibility"section.
- "Vehicle access"
● "Unlockbootonly":activation/deactivationofselectivebootunlocking.
Seethe"Access"section.
33
1
Monitoring
Thefunctionsavailablethroughthismenuaredetailedinthetablebelow.
"Conguration" menu
Button Corresponding function Comments
Audio settings Adjustmentofvolume,balance...
Turn off screen Turnsoffthescreendisplayinthetouchscreentablet(blackscreen).Pressingtheblack
screenrestoresthedisplay.
Interactive help Accesstotheinteractivehandbook.
Brightness Adjustmentofthebrightnessoftheinstrumentsandcontrols.
34
Monitoring
Button Corresponding function Comments
Configuration Choiceofunits:
- temperature(°Celsiusor°Fahrenheit)
- distanceandfuelconsumption(l/100km,mpgorkm/l).
Time/Date Settingthetimeanddate.
Languages Choiceoflanguageusedbythetouchscreentablet:French,English,Italian,Spanish,
German,Dutch,Portuguese,Polish,Turkish,Russian,Serb,Croat,Hungarian,Czech,
Brazilian.
Screen settings Adjustmentofthedisplaysettings(scrollingoftext,animations...).
Calculator Displaythecalculator.
Calendar Displaythecalendar.
35
1
Monitoring
Tripcomputer
Systemthatgivesyouinformationonthejourneyinprogress(range,fuelconsumption…).
Information display in the touch screen tablet
F Select the "Driving assistance"
menu.
- Thecurrentfuelconsumptiontab
with:
● therange,
● thecurrentfuelconsumption,
● theStop&Starttimecounter.
- Thetrip"1"tabwith:
● theaveragefuelconsumption,
● thedistancetravelled.
● theaveragespeed,
forthefirsttrip.
- Thetrip"2"tabwith:
● theaveragefuelconsumption,
● thedistancetravelled.
● theaveragespeed,
forthesecondtrip.
Trip reset
F Whenthedesiredtripisdisplayed,press
the Resetbuttonorontheendofthewiper
controlstalkuntilzerosappear.
Trips "1"and"2"areindependent.
Forexample,trip"1"canbeusedfordaily
figures,andtrip"2"formonthlyfigures.
Theinformationisaccessibleinthethetouchscreentablet.
Foratemporarydisplayinanew
window,presstheendofthewiperstalk
foraccesstotheinformationandcycle
throughthedifferenttabs.
Thetripcomputerinformationisdisplayedin
theprimarypageofthemenu.
F Pressoneofthebuttonstodisplaythe
desiredtab.
36
Monitoring
Trip computer, a few definitions
Range
(milesorkm)
Thedistancewhichcanstillbe
travelledwiththefuelremainingin
thetank(relatedtotheaveragefuel
consumptionoverthelastfewmiles
(kilometres)travelled).
Thisvaluemayvaryfollowingachange
inthestyleofdrivingortherelief,
resultinginasignificantchangeinthe
currentfuelconsumption.
Whentherangefallsbelow20miles(30km),
dashesaredisplayed.Afterfillingwithatleast
5litresoffuel,therangeisrecalculatedandis
displayedwhenitexceeds60miles(100km).
Ifdashesaredisplayedcontinuously
whiledrivinginplaceofthedigits,
contactaCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshop.
Thisfunctionisonlydisplayedfrom
20mph(30km/h).
Current fuel
consumption
(mpgorl/100kmorkm/l)
Calculatedoverthelastfewseconds.
Average fuel consumption
(mpgorl/100kmorkm/l)
Calculatedsincethelasttrip
computerreset.
Distance travelled
(milesorkm)
Calculatedsincethelasttrip
computerreset.
Average speed
(mphorkm/h)
Calculatedsincethelasttrip
computerreset.
Stop & Start time
counter
(minutes/secondsorhours/
minutes)
IfyourvehicleisfittedwithStop&Start,atime
countercalculatesthetimespentinSTOP
modeduringajourney.
Itresetstozeroeverytimetheignitionis
switchedon.
37
1
Monitoring
Total distance recorder
Systemwhichmeasuresthetotaldistance
travelledbythevehicleduringitslife.
Thetotaldistancerecorderisdisplayed
continuouslyintheinstrumentpanel,assoon
asthedriver'sdoorisopened,aswellaswhen
thevehicleislockedorunlocked.
Toconformtolegislationinthe
countryyouarecrossing,changethe
unitsofdistance(milesorkm)inthe
"Configuration"menuofthetouch
screentablet.
Thisoperationmustbecarriedoutwith
thevehiclestationary.
Systemwhichmeasuresadistancetravelled
(daily,forexample)sinceitwasresettozeroby
thedriver.
This function is accessible from the trip
computer in the touch screen tablet.
Trip distance recorder
F Select the "Driving assistance"
menu.
F Select the tab for trip "1"
or trip "2".
F Toresetthetriprecordertozero,press
the "Reset"buttonortheendofthewiper
controlstalkuntilzerosappear.
Distancerecorders
38
Monitoring
Settingthedateandtime
F Select "Adjust time" or "Adjust date"
andmodifythesettingsusingthenumber
keypad,thenconfirm.
F Inthesecondarypage,presson
"Time/Date".
F Select the "Configuration"
menu.
F Press "Confirm"toquit.
This function is accessible in the touch screen
tablet.
39
2
Acc ess
Systemwhichpermitscentralunlockingorlockingofthevehicleusingthedoorlockorfromadistance.
Itisalsousedtolocateandstartthevehicle,aswellasprovidingprotectionagainsttheft.
Remotecontrolkey
Unfolding / folding the key Unlocking the vehicle
Unlocking using the key
F Turnthekeyinthedriver'sdoorlock
towardsthefrontofthevehicletounlock.
Unlocking using the remote
control
F Presstheopenpadlocktounlock
thevehicle.
Unlockingisconfirmedbyrapid
flashingofthedirectionindicatorsfor
approximatelytwoseconds.
F Pressthisbuttontounfoldorfoldthekey.
Selective unlocking of the boot
F Pressandholdthecentralbutton
ontheremotecontroluntilthe
bootunlocks.Thedoorsremain
locked.
Ifselectiveunlockingofthebootis
deactivated,pressingthisbuttonalso
unlocksthedoors.
Don'tforgettolockthebootagainby
pressingtheclosedpadlockbutton.
Theactivationordeactivationofselectiveboot
unlockingissetinthetouchscreentablet.
Selectiveunlockingofthebootis
activatedbydefault.
F Select the "Driving assistance"
menu.
F Inthesecondarypage,presson
"Vehicle settings".
40
Acc ess
Ifoneofthedoorsorthebootisstill
open,thecentrallockingdoesnot
takeplace;thevehiclelocksthen
immediatelyunlocks,identifiablebythe
soundofthelocksrebounding.
Whenthevehicleislocked,ifitis
unlockedinadvertently,itwilllock
againautomaticallyafterthirtyseconds
unlessadoororthebootisopen.
Locking using the remote control
F Presstheclosedpadlocktolock
thevehicle.
Locking the vehicle
Lockingisconfirmedbythefixedillumination
ofthedirectionindicatorsforapproximately
twoseconds.
Locking using the key
F Turnthekeyinthedriver'sdoorlock,
towardstherearofthevehicletolockit.
Thisfunctionallowsyoutoidentifyyourvehicle
fromadistance,especiallywhenthelightis
poor.Yourvehiclemustbelocked.
Locating your vehicle Anti-theft protection
Electronic engine immobiliser
Thekeycontainsanelectronicchipwhichhas
aspecialcode.Whentheignitionisswitched
on,thiscodemustberecognisedinorderfor
startingtobepossible.
Thiselectronicengineimmobiliserlocksthe
enginemanagementsystemafewminutes
aftertheignitionisswitchedoffandprevents
startingoftheenginebyanyonewhodoesnot
havethekey.
In the event of a fault, you are
informedbyilluminationofthis
warninglamp,anaudiblesignal
andamessageinthescreen.
F Presstheclosedpadlockonthe
remotecontrol.
Thiswillbringonthecourtesylampsand
flashingofthedirectionindicatorsforafew
seconds.
Keepsafely,awayfromyourvehicle,thelabel
attachedtothekeysgiventoyouonacquisition
ofthevehicle.
Inthiscase,yourvehiclewillnotstart;contact
aCITROËNdealerassoonaspossible.
Checkthatthedoorsandbootarefully
closed.
41
2
Acc ess
Deadlockingrenderstheexteriorand
interiordoorcontrolsinoperative.
Italsodeactivatesthemanualcentral
controlbutton.
Therefore,neverleaveanyoneinside
thevehiclewhenitisdeadlocked.
Deadlockingisconfirmedbyfixed
lightingofthedirectionindicatorsfor
approximatelytwoseconds.
Dependingonversion,thedoormirrors
foldatthesametime.
Deadlocking
Using the key Using the remote control
F Presstheclosedpadlocktolock
thevehiclecompletely.
F Turnthekeytotherearinthedriver'sdoor
locktolockthevehiclecompletely.
F Turnthekeytotherearagainwithinfive
secondstodeadlockthevehicle.
F Presstheclosedpadlockagainwithinfive
secondstodeadlockthevehicle.
42
Acc ess
Iftheproblempersists,contacta
CITROËNdealerassoonaspossible.
If the battery is flat, you are
informedbyilluminationofthis
warninglamp,anaudiblesignal
andamessageinthescreen.
Changing the battery
F Removetheflatbatteryfromitslocation.
F Fit the new battery into its location
observingtheoriginaldirectionoffitment.
F Clipthecoverontothecasing.
Intheeventofafaultwiththeremotecontrol,
youcannolongerunlock,lockorlocate
yourvehicle.
F Firstofall,usethekeyinthelocktounlock
orlockyourvehicle.
F Then,reinitialisetheremotecontrol.
Fault with the remote
control
Reinitialisation
F Switchofftheignitionandremovethe
ignitionkey.
F Presstheclosedpadlockimmediatelyfora
fewseconds.
F Turnthekeytoposition2 (Ignition on).
F Switchofftheignitionandremovethekey
fromtheignitionswitch.
Theremotecontrolisfullyoperationalagain.
Batteryref.:CR2032/3volts.
F Unclipthecoverusingasmallscrewdriver
atthecutout.
F Liftoffthecover.
43
2
Acc ess
Lost keys
GotoaCITROËNdealerwiththevehicle'sregistrationdocument,yourpersonal
identificationdocumentsandifpossiblethekeycodelabel.
TheCITROËNdealerwillbeabletolookupthekeycodeandthetranspondercode
requiredtoorderanewkey.
Remote control
Thehighfrequencyremotecontrolisasensitivesystem;donotoperateitwhileitisinyour
pocketasthereisapossibilitythatitmayunlockthevehicle,withoutyoubeingawareofit.
Donotrepeatedlypressthebuttonsofyourremotecontroloutofrangeandoutofsightof
yourvehicle.Youruntheriskofstoppingitfromworkingandtheremotecontrolwouldhave
tobereinitialised.
Noremotecontrolcanoperatewhenthekeyisintheignitionswitch,evenwhentheignition
isswitchedoff,exceptforreinitialisation.
Locking the vehicle
Drivingwiththedoorslockedmaymakeaccesstothepassengercompartmentbythe
emergencyservicesmoredifficultinanemergency.
Asasafetyprecaution,neverleavechildrenaloneinthevehicle,exceptforaveryshortperiod.
Inallcases,itisessentialtoremovethekeyfromtheignitionswitchwhenleavingthevehicle.
Anti-theft protection
Donotmakeanymodificationstotheelectronicengineimmobilisersystem;thiscould
causemalfunctions.
When purchasing a second-hand vehicle
HavethepairingofallofthekeysinyourpossessioncheckedbyaCITROËNdealer,to
ensurethatonlyyourkeyscanbeusedtoopenandstartthevehicle.
Donotthrowtheremotecontrol
batteriesaway,theycontainmetals
whichareharmfultotheenvironment.
Takethemtoanapprovedcollection
point.
44
Acc ess
Manual central locking
Centrallocking
F
Pressthisbuttontooperatethecentrallocking
ofthevehicle(doorsandboot)frominsidethe
vehicle,theindicatorlampinthebuttoncomeson.
F
Pressingthebuttonagainunlocksthevehicle
completely,theindicatorlampinthebutton
goesoff.
Automatic central
locking
(anti-intrusion security)
Thedoorsandbootcanlockautomatically
whiledriving(speedabove6mph(10km/h)).
Toactivateordeactivatethisfunction
(activatedbydefault):
F Pressthisbuttonuntilanaudiblesignal
isheardandamessageappearsin
thescreen.
Ifoneofthedoorsisopen,central
lockingfromtheinsidedoesnottake
place.
Drivingwiththedoorslockedmaymake
accesstothepassengercompartment
bytheemergencyservicesmore
difficultinanemergency.
Transporting long or voluminous
objects
Ifyouwanttodrivewiththebootopen,
pressthecentrallockingcontrolbutton
tolockthedoors.
Ifthevehicleisdeadlockedorlocked
fromtheoutside,thebuttonisnot
active.Ifthevehicleisnotdeadlocked,
usetheremotecontroltounlockthe
vehicleorpullaninteriordoorhandleto
openadoor.
45
2
Acc ess
Doors
From outside
F Afterunlockingthevehicleusingthe
remotecontrolorthekey,pullthedoor
handle.
Opening
From inside
F Pulltheinteriorcontrolleverofafrontdoor;
thisunlocksthevehiclecompletely.
Theinterioropeningcontrolonarear
doordoesnotworkifthechildlockison.
Refertothe"Childlock"section.
Whenadoorisnotfullyclosed:
- engine running,amessageappearsin
the screen,
- vehicle moving,amessageappearsin
thescreen,accompaniedbyanaudible
signal.
Closing
46
Acc ess
Secondary control
Driver's door (locking/unlocking)
Insertthekeyinthelocktolockorunlock
thedoor.
Procedureformechanicallylockingand
unlockingthedoorsintheeventofafaultwith
thecentrallockingsystemorabatteryfailure.
Front and rear passenger doors
Locking
In the event of a fault with the central
lockingsystem,itisessentialto
disconnectthebatterytolocktheboot
andsoensurecompletelockingof
thevehicle.
Onthereardoors,checkthatthechild
lockisnoton.
F Removetheblackcaplocatedontheedge
ofthedoor,usingthekey.
F Insertthekeyintotheaperturewithout
forcing,thenwithoutturning,movethe
latchsidewaystowardstheinsideofthe
door.
F Removethekeyandrefitthecap.
Unlocking
F Pulltheinteriordooropeningcontrollever.
47
2
Acc ess
Boot
Opening
F Afterunlockingtheboot(seethe"Remote
controlkey"section),presstheopening
controlandraisethetailgate.
F Lowerthetailgateusingtheinteriorgrab
handle.
Closing Boot release
Unlocking
F Foldtherearseatbackresttogainaccess
tothelockfrominsidetheboot.
F InsertasmallscrewdriverintoholeA of the
locktounlockthetailgate.
Systemformechanicalunlockingoftheboot
intheeventofabatteryorcentrallocking
malfunction.
Ifthetailgateisnotfullyclosed:
- engine running,amessageappearsin
the screen,
- vehicle moving,amessageappearsin
thescreen,accompaniedbyanaudible
signal.
48
Acc ess
Frontelectricwindowcontrols
Theelectricwindowswitches
remainoperationalforapproximately
45secondsaftertheignitionis
switchedofforuntilafrontdoor
isopened.If,duringthisperiodof
45seconds,youopenadoorwhile
operatingawindow,thewindowstops.
Thewindowswitchwillthenonlybe
operativeaftertheignitionisswitched
onagain.
1. Front left electric window switch.
2. Front right electric window switch.
F Presstheswitchtoopenthewindow.
F Pulltheswitchtoclosethewindow.
Thewindowstopswhenyoureleasetheswitch.
Alwaysremovethekeyfromtheignition
whenleavingthevehicle,evenfora
shorttime.
Intheeventofcontactduringoperation
ofthewindows,reversethemovement
ofthewindow.Todothis,pressthe
correspondingswitch.
Whenthedriveroperatesthe
passengerelectricwindowswitch,they
shouldensurethatnooneispreventing
correctclosingofthewindow.
Thedrivershouldensurethatthe
passengerusestheelectricwindow
correctly.
Beparticularlyawareofchildrenwhen
operatingthewindows.
49
2
Acc ess
Reardoorwindows
Opening Closing
F Tilttheleveroutwards.
F Pushitfullytosecurethewindowinthe
openposition.
F Pullthelevertoreleasethewindow.
F Tilttheleverfullyinwardstosecurethe
windowintheclosedposition.
Eachwindowcanbehingedopentoprovideventilationattherearseats.
50
Comfor t
Front seats
F Raise the control Aandslidetheseat
forwardsorbackwards.
F Pull the control Cupwardstoraisetheseat
orpushitdownwardstolowerit,asmany
timesasrequired,toobtainthedesired
position.
F TurntheknobBtoadjustthebackrest.
Forwards-backwards HeightSeat backrest angle
Adjustments
(driver only)
Asasafetymeasure,adjustmentstothedriver'sseatmustonlybedonewhenstationary.
Beforemovingtheseatbackwards,ensurethatthereisnothingthatmightpreventthefulltraveloftheseat,soastoavoidtheriskofofjamming
theseatcausedbythepresenceofobjectsonthefloorbehindtheseatorrearpassengers.Iftheseatjams,stopthemovementimmediately.
51
3
Comfor t
F Toraisetheheadrestraint,pullitupwards.
F Toremovetheheadrestraint,pressthe
lugAandpulltheheadrestraintupwards.
F Toputtheheadrestraintbackinplace,
engagetheheadrestraintstemsinthe
openingskeepingtheminlinewiththeseat
back.
F Tolowertheheadrestraint,pressthelugA
andtheheadrestraintatthesametime.
Theheadrestrainthasaframewith
notcheswhichpreventsitfromlowering;
thisisasafetydeviceincaseofimpact.
The adjustment is correct when the
upper edge of the head restraint is
level with the top of the head.
Neverdrivewiththeheadrestraints
removed;theymustbeinplaceand
adjustedcorrectly.
Head restraint height
52
Comfor t
Folding the backrest
Repositioning the seat backrest
F Straightentheseatbackrest2andsecureit.
F Unfastenandreturntheseatbeltstothe
sidesofthebackrest.
F Movethefrontseatsforwardifnecessary.
F Positiontheseatbeltsonthebackrestand
bucklethem.
F Placetheheadrestraintsinthelow
position.
F Press both controls 1simultaneouslyto
releasetheseatbackrest2.
F Foldtheseatbackrest2ontothecushion.
Whenrepositioningthebackrest,
ensure that the seat belts are not
trappedandtheredindicator,located
nexttothecontrols1,isnolonger
visible.
Rear seats
Benchseatwithfixedone-piececushionandfoldingone-piecebackrest.
Whenfoldingtheseat,thecentreseat
beltshouldnotbebuckledbutlaidout
flatontheseat.
53
3
Comfor t
Rear head restraints
Theycanberemovedandareinterchangeable
sidetoside.
Toremoveaheadrestraint:
F Pulltheheadrestraintupwardstothestop.
F Then,pressthelugA.
Neverdrivewiththeheadrestraints
removed;theymustbeinplaceand
adjustedtothenormalposition(up).
Thesehaveonepositionforuse(up)anda
stowedposition(down).
Torefitaheadrestraint:
F Engagetheheadrestraintrodsinthe
apertures,keepingtheheadrestraintinline
withtheseatbackrest.
Toloweraheadrestraint:
F Pressdownontheheadrestraintandon
lugAatthesametime.
54
Comfor t
Mirrors
Eachfittedwithanadjustablemirrorglass
providingthelateralrearwardvisionnecessary
forovertakingorparking.Theycanalsobe
foldedforparkinginconfinedspaces.
Door mirrors
Demisting - Defrosting
F Move control Atotherightortotheleftto
selectthecorrespondingmirror.
F Movecontrolinallfourdirectionstoadjust.
F Returncontroltothecentralposition.
Demisting-defrostingofthedoor
mirrorsoperateswiththeengine
running,byswitchingontheheated
rearscreen.
Electric adjustment
Theobjectsobservedare,inreality,
closerthantheyappear.
Takethisintoaccountinorderto
correctlyjudgethedistanceofvehicles
approachingfrombehind.
Manual folding
Youcanfoldthemirrorsmanually(tightparking
space,narrowgarage...).
F Turnthemirrortowardsthevehicle.
Asasafetymeasure,themirrorsshould
beadjustedtoreducethe"blindspots".
Formoreinformationondemistingand
defrostingtherearscreen,refertothe
correspondingsection.
55
3
Comfor t
Rear view mirror
Adjustablemirrorprovidingacentralrearward
view.
Equippedwithananti-dazzlesystem,which
darkensthemirrorglassandreducesthe
nuisancetothedrivercausedbythesun,
headlampsfromothervehicles...
Adjustment
F Adjustthemirrorsothattheglassis
directedcorrectlyinthe"day"position.
Day / night position
F Pullthelevertochangetothe"night"anti-
dazzleposition.
F Pushthelevertochangetothenormal
"day"position.
56
Comfor t
Steeringwheeladjustment
F When stationary, lower the control lever A
toreleasethesteeringwheeladjustment
mechanism.
F Adjusttheheightofthesteeringwheelto
suityourdrivingposition.
F Raise the control lever Atolockthe
steeringwheeladjustmentmechanism.
As a safety precaution, these
operationsshouldonlybecarriedout
whilethevehicleisstationary.
Correct driving position
Beforetakingtotheroadandtomakethemost
oftheergonomicsofyourdrivingposition,carry
outtheseadjustmentsinthefollowingorder:
- heightoftheheadrestraint,
- backrestangle,
- cushionheight,
- longitudinalpositionoftheseat,
- heightofthesteeringwheel,
- theinterioranddoormirrors.
Oncetheseadjustmentshavebeenmade,
ensurethatfromyourdrivingpositionyou
canseetheinstrumentpanelclearly.
57
3
Comfor t
Ventilation
Air intake
Theaircirculatinginthepassenger
compartmentisfilteredandoriginateseither
fromtheoutsideviathegrillelocatedatthe
baseofthewindscreenorfromtheinsideinair
recirculationmode.
Air treatment
Theincomingairfollowsvariousroutes
dependingonthecontrolsselectedbythe
driver:
- directarrivalinthepassenger
compartment(airintake),
- passagethroughaheatingcircuit(heating),
- passagethroughacoolingcircuit(air
conditioning).
Control panel
1. Windscreendemisting-defrostingvents.
2. Frontsidewindowdemisting/defrosting
vents.
3. Adjustablesideairvent(driveronly).
4. Centraladjustableairvents.
5. Airoutletsforthefrontfootwells.
6. Airoutletsfortherearfootwells.
Air distribution
Thecontrolsofthissystemare
accessible in the "Air conditioning"
menuofthetouchscreentabletA.
Thedemisting/defrostingcontrolsforthe
windscreenandrearscreenarelocatedbelow
thetouchscreentablet.
58
Comfor t
Inorderforthesesystemstobefullyeffective,followtheoperationandmaintenance
guidelinesbelow:
F Toobtainanevenairdistribution,takecarenottoobstructtheexteriorairintakegrilles
locatedatthebaseofthewindscreen,thenozzles,theventsandtheairoutlets,aswell
astheairextractorlocatedintheboot.
F Donotcoverthesunshinesensor,locatedonthedashboard;thisisusedforregulation
oftheairconditioningsystem.
F Operatetheairconditioningsystemforatleast5to10minutes,onceortwiceamonth
tokeepitinperfectworkingorder.
F Ensurethatthepassengercompartmentfilterisingoodconditionandhavethefilter
elementsreplacedregularly.
Werecommendtheuseofacombinedpassengercompartmentfilter.Thankstoits
specialactiveadditive,itcontributestothepurificationoftheairbreathedbythe
occupantsandthecleanlinessofthepassengercompartment(reductionofallergic
symptoms,badodoursandgreasydeposits).
F Toensurecorrectoperationoftheairconditioningsystem,youarealsoadvisedtohave
itcheckedregularlyasrecommendedinthemaintenanceandwarrantyguide.
F Ifthesystemdoesnotproducecoldair,switchitoffandcontactaCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshop.
Recommendationsforventilationandairconditioning
Ifafteranextendedstopinsunshine,
theinteriortemperatureisveryhigh,first
ventilatethepassengercompartmentfor
afewmoments.
Puttheairflowcontrolatasettinghigh
enoughtoquicklychangetheairinthe
passengercompartment.
Theairconditioningsystemdoesnot
containchlorineanddoesnotpresent
anydangertotheozonelayer.
Thecondensationcreatedbytheair
conditioningresultsinadischarge
ofwaterunderthevehiclewhichis
perfectlynormal.
Whentowingthemaximumloadonasteepgradientinhightemperatures,switchingoffthe
airconditioningincreasestheavailableenginepowerandsoimprovesthetowingability.
Stop & Start
Theheatingandairconditioning
systemsonlyworkwhentheengine
isrunning.Tomaintainacomfortable
temperatureinthepassenger
compartment,youcantemporarily
deactivatetheStop&Startsystem(see
thecorrespondingsection).
59
3
Comfor t
Heating
Temperature adjustment
F Press one of these buttons
ormovethecursorfromblue
(cold)tored(hot)toadjustthe
temperaturetoyourwishes.
Air flow adjustment
F Press one of these buttons to
increaseordecreasetheairflow
fromthesystem.
Avoiddrivingfortoolongwithout
ventilation(riskofmistingand
deteriorationofairquality).
Theheatingsystemworksonlywhentheengineisrunning.
Thesymbolforairflow(afan)fillsprogressively
accordingtotheairflowsettingmade.
Byreducingtheairflowtotheminimum,you
arestoppingventilationofthepassenger
compartment.
F Select the "Air conditioning"
menuinthetouchscreentablet
todisplaythecontrolspagefor
thesystem.
60
Comfor t
Air distribution adjustment
Theintakeofexteriorairpreventsand
eliminatesmistingofthewindscreenandside
windows.
Therecirculationofinteriorairpreventsexterior
odoursandsmokeenteringthepassenger
compartment.
Windscreen.
Centreandsidevents.
Footwells.
Eachpressofabuttonactivatesordeactivates
thefunction.
Air intake / Air recirculation
F Press this button to recirculate
theinteriorair.
F Pressthisbuttonagaintoallowtheintake
ofexteriorair.
Thisfunctioncanalsobeused
temporarilytospeeduptheheatingof
theairinthepassengercompartment.
Avoidtheprolongeduseofrecirculation
oftheinteriorair(riskofmistingand
deteriorationofairquality).
Youcanvarytheairdistributioninthepassenger
compartmentusingthesethreebuttons.
Foranevendistributionofairinthe
passengercompartment,thethree
buttonscanbeactivatedsimultaneously.
61
3
Comfor t
Manualairconditioning
Temperature adjustment
F Press one of these buttons or
movethecursorblue(cold)
tored(hot)toadjustthe
temperaturetoyourliking.
Theairconditioningsystemoperateswiththeenginerunning.
Air flow adjustment
F Press one of these buttons to
increaseordecreasetheairflow.
Thesymbolforairflow(afan)fillsprogressively
accordingtotheairflowsettingmade.
Byreducingtheairflowtominimum,youare
stoppingventilation.
Avoiddrivingtoolongwithoutventilation
(riskofmistinganddeteriorationofair
quality).
F Select the "Air conditioning"
menuinthetouchscreentablet
todisplaythecontrolspagefor
thesystem.
62
Comfor t
Fresh air intake / Air
recirculation
Theintakeoffreshairavoidsandeliminates
mistingofthewindscreenandsidewindows.
Recirculation of the interior air isolates the
passengercompartmentfromexteriorodours
andfumes.
F Press this button to recirculate
theinteriorair.
Theairconditioningisdesignedtooperate
effectivelyinallseasons,withthewindowsclosed.
Itenablesyouto:
Air conditioning On / Off
Switching on
Switching off
Theairconditioningdoesnotoperate
whentheairflowadjustmentissetto
off.
F Press this button to switch on the
airconditioning.
Avoidtheprolongeduseofinterior
airrecirculation(riskofmistingand
deteriorationofairquality).
Thisfunctioncanalsobeused
temporarilytospeeduptheheatingor
coolingofthepassengercompartment.
- lowerthetemperature,insummer,
- increasetheeffectivenessofthedemisting
inwinter,above3°C.
F Pressthisbuttonagaintoswitch
offtheairconditioning.
Air distribution adjustment
Youcanmodulatethedistributionofairinthe
passengercompartmentusingthesethree
buttons.
Windscreen.
Eachpressonabuttonactivatesordeactivates
thefunction.
Footwells.
Centralandsidevents.
F Pressthisbuttonagaintoallowtheintake
ofexteriorair.
Forauniformdistributionofairinthe
passengercompartment,thethree
buttonscanbeactivatedsimultaneously.
63
3
Comfor t
Automaticairconditioning
Operationoftheairconditioningandregulation
oftemperature,airflowandairdistributionin
thepassengercompartmentareautomatic.
Temperature adjustment
F Press one of this button to
increasethevalue.
F Press one of this button to
decreasethevalue.
F Select the "Air conditioning"
menuinthetouchscreentablet
todisplaythecontrolspagefor
thesystem.
Theairconditioningsystemoperates
automatically:thesystemmanagesthe
temperature,airflowandairdistributionin
thepassengercompartmentinanoptimum
wayaccordingtothecomfortlevelyouhave
selected.
F Press the "AUTO" button
toactivateordeactivatethe
automaticmodeoftheair
conditioningsystem.
Automatic comfort
programme
Activation / Deactivation
Thisairconditioningsystemoperateswiththeenginerunning,buttheventilationanditscontrolsareavailablewiththeignitionon.
Thevalueindicatedcorrespondstoa
levelofcomfortandnottoaprecise
temperature.
64
Comfor t
Incoldweatherwiththeenginecold,
theairflowisincreasedgraduallyuntil
thesystemhaswarmedup,inorder
tolimitthedeliveryofcoldairintothe
passengercompartment.
Onenteringthevehicle,iftheinterior
temperatureismuchcolderorwarmer
thanthecomfortvaluesetting,there
isnoneedtoalterthevaluedisplayed
inordertoreachmorequicklythe
requiredlevelofcomfort.Thesystem
compensatesautomaticallyand
correctsthetemperaturedifferenceas
quicklyaspossible.
ThissettingisassociatedwithAUTOmode
only.However,ondeactivationofAUTOmode,
thelastsettingusedremainson.
ChangingthesettingdoesnotreactivateAUTO
modeifdeactivated.
Tochangethecurrentsetting,pressthebutton
forthedesiredmode:
"Soft":providessoftandquiet
operationbylimitingairflow.
"Normal":offersthebest
compromisebetweenacomfortable
temperatureandquietoperation
(defaultsetting).
"Fast":providesstrongandeffective
airflow.
Automatic programme mode
setting
F Gotothesecondarypage
bypressingthisbuttonto
modulatetheautomaticcomfort
programme,choosingoneofthe
modesoffered.
65
3
Comfor t
Youcanmodulatethedistributionofairinthe
passengercompartmentusingthesethreebuttons.
Air ow adjustment
Avoiddrivingfortoolongwiththe
ventilationoff(riskofmistingand
deteriorationofairquality).
Air distribution adjustment
F Press one of these buttons to
increaseordecreasetheairflow.
Thesymbolforairflow(afan)fillsprogressively
accordingtotheairflowsettingmade.
Byreducingtheairflowtominimum,youare
stoppingventilation.
"OFF"isdisplayedalongsidethefan.
Windscreen.
Centreandsidevents.
Footwells.
Eachpressonabuttonactivatesordeactivates
thefunction.
Resuming manual control
Youcanmanuallyadjusttheairflowand
distribution.
F Press the "AUTO" button to
activatetheautomaticcomfort
programmeagain.
Assoonasyoumodifyasetting,theautomatic
comfortprogrammeisdeactivated.
Forauniformdistributioninthe
passengercompartment,allthree
buttonscanbepressedsimultaneously.
66
Comfor t
Avoidtheprolongeduseofinterior
airrecirculation(riskofmistingand
deteriorationofairquality).
Itallowsyou:
- insummer,tolowerthetemperature,
- inwinter,above3°C,toimprovedemisting.
F Pressthisbuttonagaintoswitch
offtheairconditioning.
F Press this button to switch on the
airconditioning.
Air conditioning On/Off
Theairconditioningisdesignedtooperate
efficientlyinallseasons,withthewindows
closed.
Theintakeofexteriorairavoidsandeliminated
mistingofthewindscreenandsidewindows.
Air intake/Air recirculation
Therecirculationofinteriorairpreventsexterior
odoursandsmokefromenteringthepassenger
compartment.
F Press this button to recirculate
theinteriorair.
F Pressthisbuttonagaintoallow
theintakeofexteriorair.
Theairconditioningcannotoperate
whentheairflowissettooff.
Thisfunctionalsoallowsfasterheating
orcoolingoftheairinthepassenger
compartment.
Ventilation with "ignition on"
function
Withtheignitionon,youcanusethe
ventilationsystemandhaveaccesstothe
"Air conditioning"menutoadjusttheair
flowandair distributioninthepassenger
compartment.
Thisfunctionisavailableforafewminutes,
dependingonthestateofchargeofthebattery
ofyourvehicle.
Thisfunctiondoesnotactivatetheair
conditioning.
Youcanmakeuseoftheresidualheatinthe
enginetowarmthepassengercompartment
usingthetemperaturesettingbuttons.
Switching on
Switching off
67
3
Comfor t
Frontdemist-defrost
Switching on
WithStop&Start,whendemistinghas
beenactivated,theSTOPmodeisnot
available.
F Pressthisbuttontodemistor
defrostthewindscreenandside
windowsasquicklyaspossible.
Theindicatorlampinthebutton
comeson.
Thesystemautomaticallymanagestheair
conditioning(dependingonversion),air
flowandairintake,andprovidesoptimum
distributiontowardsthewindscreenandside
windows.
Switching off
F Toswitchoffdemisting,press
thisbuttonagain,theindicator
lampgoesoff.
68
Comfor t
Rearscreendemist-defrost
Switching on
Switching off
F Pressthisbuttontodemist/
defrosttherearscreenand
(dependingonversion)thedoor
mirrors.Theindicatorlampinthe
buttoncomeson.
Thedemisting/defrostingswitchesoffautomatically
topreventanexcessiveconsumptionofcurrent.
Therearscreendemist-defrost
canonlyoperatewhentheengineis
running.
Switchofftheheatingoftherearscreen
anddoormirrorsassoonasyoujudgeit
possible,asreducingtheconsumption
ofelectricalcurrentreducesfuel
consumption.
F It is possible to stop the
demisting/defrostingoperation
beforeitisswitchedoff
automaticallybypressingthis
buttonagain.Theindicatorlamp
inthebuttongoesoff.
69
4
Fittings
Interiorttings
withamanualgearbox
1. Sun visor.
2. Glove box.
IthousesanauxiliarysocketandaUSB
port(dependingonversion).
3. 12 V accessory socket (max. 120 W).
4. USB port.
5. Open storage.
6. Cup holder.
7. Front armrest with storage.
(dependingonversion).
8. Front door pockets.
9. Mat.
70
Fittings
Interiorttings
withanelectronicgearbox
1. Sun visor.
2. Glove box.
IthousesanauxiliarysocketandaUSB
port(dependingonversion).
3. 12 V accessory socket (max. 120 W).
4. USB port.
5. Open storage.
6. Cup holder.
7. Front armrest.
8. Front door pockets.
9. Mat.
71
4
Fittings
Glove boxSun visor
Componenttoprotectagainstsunlightfromthe
frontortheside.
Thedriver'ssunvisorisfittedwithavanity
mirror,withconcealingflapandacard(or
ticket)holder.
Itcanbeusedtoholdawaterbottle,the
vehicle'shandbookpack...
F Toconnecta12Vaccessory(maximum
power:120Watts),liftthecoverand
connectasuitableadaptor.
12 V accessory socket
F Toopentheglovebox,raisethelid.
Donotexceedthemaximumpower
ratingofthesocket(riskofdamageto
yourdevice).
Ithousesanauxiliarysocket,aUSB
port(dependingonequipment)andthe
frontpassengerairbagdeactivation
switch.
72
Fittings
Auxiliary socketUSB port(s)*
Forbestreception,itisrecommended
that the "CITROËN MULTICITY
CONNECT"connectionkeybeplugged
intotheUSBportlocatedintheglove
box(dependingonversion).
WhenaUSBportisused,theportable
devicechargesautomatically.
Formoreinformationontheuseof
thisequipment,refertothe"Audioand
telematics"section.
Formoreinformationonusingthis
equipment,refertothe"Audioand
telematics"section.
Itpermitstheconnectionofaportabledevice
tolistentoyourmusicfilesusingthevehicle's
speakers.
Themanagementofthefilesisdoneusingyour
portabledevice.
Itallowstheconnectionofaportabledeviceor
aUSBmemorystick.
Itreadstheaudiofileswhicharesenttoyour
audiosystemandplayedviathevehicle's
speakers.
Youcanmanagethesefilesusingthesteering
mountedoraudiosystemcontrols.
Amessageisdisplayedifthepower
drawnbytheportabledeviceexceeds
thecurrentsuppliedbythevehicle.
*Dependingonversion.
73
4
Fittings
Coat hooks
Theyarelocatedaboveeachreardoor.
Electronic gearbox
Thearmrestcanbeinclinedforwardsto
benefitfromitscomfortorfoldedcompletely
backwards.
Front armrest
Manual gearbox
(depending on equipment)
Thesestoragespacescanbeusedto
houseportabledevices(mobilephone,
MP3player...)whichcanbeconnected
totheUSBport/auxiliarysocketor
chargedfromthe12Vsocketinthe
centreconsole.
F Foraccesstotheclosedstoragebox,lift
thelevertoopenthelid.
F Foraccesstotheopenstorageboxbelow
thearmrest,liftthecompletearmrest
towardstherear.
74
Fittings
Toremovethematonthedriver'sside:
F movetheseatasfarbackaspossible,
F unclipthefixings,
F removethemat.
Mats
Removablecarpetprotection.
Fitting
Whenfittingthematforthefirsttime,onthe
driver'ssideuseonlythefixingsprovided.
Theothermatsaresimplyplacedonthecarpet.
Removal
Toavoidanyriskofjammingofthe
pedals:
- onlyusematswhicharesuitedto
thefixingsalreadypresentinthe
vehicle;thesefixingsmustbeused,
- neverfitonematontopofanother.
Theuseofmatsnotapprovedby
CITROËNmayinterferewithaccessto
thepedalsandhindertheoperationof
thecruisecontrol/speedlimiter.
ThematsapprovedbyCITROËNhave
twofixingslocatedbelowtheseat.
Retting
Torefitthematonthedriver'sside:
F positionthematcorrectly,
F refitthefixingsbypressing,
F checkthatthematissecuredcorrectly.
75
4
Fittings
Bootttings
1. Rear parcel shelf.
2. Hook.
3. Storage box.
4. Storage net (accessory).
5. Storage net fixing rings.
Thestoragenetfixingringsarenot
intendedtosecureloadsorrestrain
baggage.
76
Fittings
Toremovetheshelf:
F unhookthetwocords,
F raisetheshelfslightly,thenremoveit.
Rear parcel shelf
Thereareseveraloptionsforstoringtheshelf:
- eitheruprightbehindthefrontseats,
- orflatatthebaseoftheboot.
Itcanbeusedtosecureshoppingbags.
Hook Storage box
Forversionswithstoragebox:itmust
beinplacebeforeloadingtheboot.
F Removethebootcarpetforaccesstothe
storagebox.
Dependingontheconfiguration,itislaidoutfor
storing:
- atowingeye,
- atemporarypuncturerepairkit,
- awarningtriangle,
- ...
77
4
Fittings
Warningtriangle(storage)
Beforeleavingyourvehicletosetup
andinstallthetriangle,switchonthe
hazardwarninglampsandputonyour
highvisibilityvest.
Refertothemanufacturer'sinstructions
onusingthetriangle.
Placing the triangle in
the road
F Placethetrianglebehindthevehicle,
asrequiredbythelegislationinforcein
yourcountry.
Thetrianglemaybestowedunderthebootcarpet(inthestoragewell)or,dependingonversion,underthefrontpassengerseat.
Thetriangleisavailableasan
accessory;contactaCITROËNdealer
oraqualifiedworkshop.
78
Driving
Afewdrivingrecommendations
Observethedrivingregulationsatalltimesand
remainvigilantwhateverthetrafficconditions.
Paycloseattentiontothetrafficandkeepyour
handsonthewheelsothatyouarereadyto
reactatanytimetoanyeventuality.
Onalongjourney,abreakeverytwohoursis
stronglyrecommended.
Indifficultweather,drivesmoothly,anticipate
theneedtobrakeandincreasethedistance
fromothervehicles.
Driving on flooded roads
Westronglyadviseagainstdrivingonflooded
roads,asthiscouldcauseseriousdamage
totheengineorgearbox,aswellastothe
electricalsystemsofyourvehicle.
Ifyouareobligedtodrivethroughwater:
- checkthatthedepthofwaterdoesnot
exceed15cm,takingaccountofwaves
thatmightbegeneratedbyotherusers,
- deactivatetheStop&Startsystem,
- driveasslowlyaspossiblewithout
stalling.Inallcases,donotexceed6mph
(10km/h),
- donotstopanddonotswitchoffthe
engine.
Onleavingthefloodedroad,assoonas
circumstancesallow,makeseverallightbrake
applicationstodrythebrakediscsandpads.
Ifindoubtonthestateofyourvehicle,contact
aCITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
Important!
Neverdrivewiththeparkingbrake
applied-Riskofoverheatingand
damagetothebrakingsystem!
Donotparkorruntheenginewhen
stationaryinareaswhereinflammable
substancesandmaterials(drygrass,
deadleaves...)mightcomeintocontact
withthehotexhaustsystem-Riskof
fire!
Neverleaveavehicleunsupervised
withtheenginerunning.Ifyouhave
toleaveyourvehiclewiththeengine
running,applytheparkingbrake
andputthegearboxintoneutralor
position N or P,dependingonthetype
ofgearbox.
79
5
Driving
Starting-switchingofftheengine
Ithas3positions:
- position1 (Stop):insertandremoving
thekey,
- position2 (Ignition on):steeringcolumn
unlocked,ignitionon,Dieselpreheating,
enginerunning,
- position3 (Starting).
Ignition switch
Switchingofftheengineleadstoaloss
ofbrakingassistance.
Ignition on position (2)
Itallowstheuseofthevehicle'selectric
equipmentorportabledevicestobecharged.
Oncethestateofchargeofthebatterydrops
tothereservelevel,thesystemswitchesto
energyeconomymode:thepowersupplyis
cutoffautomaticallytopreservetheremaining
batterycharge.
Avoidattachingheavyobjectstothe
key,whichwouldweighdownonits
bladeintheignitionswitchandcould
causeamalfunction.
80
Driving
Starting
Theparkingbrakemustbeapplied.
F Withamanualgearbox,placethegear
leverinneutralthendepresstheclutch
pedalfully.
F Withanelectronicgearbox,placethe
control at Nthenpressthebrakepedal
firmly.
F Insertthekeyintotheignitionswitch;the
systemrecognisesthecode.
Incertaincases,youmayhavetoapply
moreforcetothesteering(wheelson
fulllock,forexample).
F Withapetrolengine,operatethestarter
motorbyturningthekeytoposition3
withoutpressingtheacceleratorpedal,
untiltheenginestarts.Oncetheengineis
running,releasethekey.
F WithaDieselengine,turnthekeyto
position 2,ignitionon,tooperatethe
enginepre-heatingsystem.
Waituntilthiswarninglampgoesoffinthe
instrumentpanelthenoperatethestarter
motorbyturningthekeytoposition3
withoutpressingtheacceleratorpedal,
untiltheenginestarts.Oncetheengineis
running,releasethekey.
Inwintryconditions,thewarninglamp
canstayonforalongerperiod.When
theengineishot,thewarninglamp
doesnotcomeon.
Intemperateconditions,donotleave
theengineatidletowarmupbutmove
offstraightawayanddriveatmoderate
speed.
Neverleavetheenginerunningin
anenclosedareawithoutadequate
ventilation:internalcombustion
enginesemittoxicexhaustgases,
suchascarbonmonoxide.Dangerof
intoxicationanddeath.
Inveryseverewintryconditions
(temperaturesbelow-23°C),toensure
thecorrectoperationanddurabilityof
themechanicalcomponentsofyour
vehicle,engineandgearbox,itis
necessarytoleavetheenginerunning
for4minutesbeforemovingoff.
Iftheenginedoesnotstartstraight
away,switchofftheignition.Waitafew
momentsbeforeoperatingthestarter
motoragain.Iftheenginedoesnot
startafterseveralattempts,donotkeep
trying:youriskdamagingthestarter
motorortheengine.
ContactaCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshop.
F Unlockthesteeringcolumnbysimultaneously
turningthesteeringandthekey.
81
5
Driving
Key left in the "Ignition on"
position
Ifthekeyhasbeenleftintheignition
switch at position 2 (Ignition on),
theignitionwillbeswitchedoff
automaticallyafteronehour.
Toswitchtheignitionbackon,turnthe
keytoposition1 (Stop),thenbackto
position 2 (Ignition on).
Neverswitchofftheignitionbeforethe
vehicleisatacompletestop.
Withtheengineoff,thebrakingand
steeringassistancesystemsarealso
cutoff:riskoflossofcontrolofthe
vehicle.
Whenyouleavethevehicle,keepthe
keywithyouandlockthevehicle.
Tofacilitateunlockingofthesteering
column,itisrecommendedthatthewheels
bereturnedtothestraightaheadposition
beforeswitchingofftheengine.
Switching off
F Stopthevehicle.
F Withtheenginerunningatidle,turnthekey
to position 1.
F Removethekeyfromtheignitionswitch.
F Tolockthesteeringcolumn,turnthe
steeringuntilitlocks.
F Checkthattheparkingbrakeiscorrectly
applied,particularlyonslopingground.
Formoreinformation,refertothe
"Energyeconomymode"section.
Energy economy mode
Afterswitchingofftheengine(position1-Stop),
foramaximumof30minutesyoucanstilluse
functionssuchastheaudioandtelematic
system,thewipers,dippedbeamheadlamps,
courtesylamps,...
82
Driving
Parkingbrake
Application Release
Whenparkingonaslope,directyour
wheelsagainstthekerb,applythe
parkingbrake,engageagearand
switchofftheignition.
Whenthevehicleisbeingdriven,ifthis
warninglampandtheSTOPwarninglamp
comeon,accompaniedbyanaudible
signalandamessageinthescreen,this
indicatesthattheparkingbrakeisstillonor
hasnotbeenfullyreleased.
F Pulltheparkingbrakeleverupto
immobiliseyourvehicle.
F Pulltheparkingbrakeleverupslightly,
press the release button, then lower the
leverfully.
83
5
Driving
5-speedmanualgearbox
Engaging reverse gear
F Presstheclutchpedalfullydown.
F Pushthegearleverfullytotherightthen
backwards.
Onlyengagereversegearwhenthe
vehicleisstationarywiththeengineatidle.
Asasafetyprecautionandtofacilitate
startingoftheengine:
- alwaysselectneutral,
- presstheclutchpedal.
84
Driving
Operation
Gearefciencyindicator
Systemwhichreducesfuelconsumptionbyadvisingthedrivertochangeup,onvehiclesfittedwithamanualgearbox.
Thesystemadaptsitsgearchange
recommendationaccordingtothe
drivingconditions(slope,load,...)and
thedemandsofthedriver(power,
acceleration,braking,...).
Thesystemneversuggests:
- engagingfirstgear,
- engagingreversegear,
- engagingalowergear.
Example:
- Youareinthirdgear.
Dependingonthedrivingsituationandyour
vehicle'sequipment,thesystemmayadvise
youtoskipone(ormore)gear(s).Youcan
followthisinstructionwithoutengagingthe
intermediategears.
- Youpresstheacceleratorpedal.
- Thesystemmaysuggestthatyouengage
ahighergear.
Theinformationappearsintheinstrument
panelintheformofanarrow,accompaniedby
therecommendedgear.
OncertainDieselversionswithmanual
gearbox,thesystemmaysuggest
changingintoneutral(Nisdisplayedin
theinstrumentpanel)sothattheengine
cangointostandby(STOPmode
withStop&Start),incertaindriving
conditions.
Thegearengagementrecommendationsmust
notbeconsideredcompulsory.Infact,the
configurationoftheroad,theamountoftraffic
andsafetyremaindeterminingfactorswhen
choosingthebestgear.Therefore,thedriver
remainsresponsiblefordecidingwhetherornot
tofollowtheadvicegivenbythesystem.
Thissystemcannotbedeactivated.
85
5
Driving
ETGelectronicgearbox
N Neutral:withyourfootonthebrake,press
thiscontroltoputthegearboxintoneutral
andforstartingtheengine.
D Drive:pressthiscontroltoengageforward
drivewithautomaticoperationofthegears.
R Reverse:withyourfootonthebrake,press
thiscontroltoengagereverse.
Control panel
F Pressthebackofthepaddleto
the rightofthesteeringwheelto
change up.
Steering mounted controls
Thesteeringmountedpaddlesdonot
allowneutraltobeselected,orreverse
geartobeengagedordisengaged.
Fiveorsix-speedelectronicallycontrolledgearboxwhichoffersthecomfortofautomaticcontrolofthegears,withoutanyactionbythedriver.
Youcantemporarilytakecontrolofgearchangesatanytime,usingthesteeringmountedcontrolpaddles.
F Pressthebackofthepaddleto
the leftofthesteeringwheelto
change down.
Display in the instrument panel
F Place your foot on the brake
whenthiswarninglampflashes.
N Neutral
Dand1 2 3 4 5 / 6Drive(forwarddrive)andthe
gearengaged.
R Reverse
86
Driving
Nflashesintheinstrumentpanel,
accompaniedbyanaudiblesignaland
amessageifthecontrolN has not been
pressedforstarting.
Press control Ntoselectneutral.
Moving off
F Switchontheignition.
F Selectneutral(controlN).
Theindicatorlampforthecontrolcomeson.
F Pressthebrakepedalfully.
F Starttheengine.
Nappearsintheinstrumentpanel.
F Selectforwarddrive(controlD)orreverse
(controlR).
Theassociatedindicatorlampcomesonin
thecontrolpanel.
Dand1 or Rappearintheinstrument
panel.
Creep function
This function allows the vehicle to be
manoeuvredmoreeasilyatlowspeeds(when
parking,intrafficjams...).
AfterpressingcontrolD or R, the vehicle
moves as soon as you take your foot off the
brake pedal,atlowspeedandwiththeengine
atidle.
Thecreepfunctionmaybetemporarily
unavailableiftheclutchtemperatureis
toohighortheslopetoosteep.
Donotleavechildrenunsupervised
insidethevehiclewhentheengineis
running.
Youmustkeepyourfootonthebrake
pedalwhilestartingtheengine.
The"Footonthebrake"warningand
theassociatedcontrolpanelindicator
lampflashifthebrakepedalisnot
pressedwhenstartingtheengine.
Pressfirmlyonthebrakepedal.
F Releasetheparkingbrake.
F Progressivelytakeyourfootoffthebrake
pedal.
Thevehiclemovesoff.
87
5
Driving
Neverselectneutral(positionN)when
moving.
Forward drive
F Press control D.
Theindicatorlampinthecontrolcomeson.
Dandthegearengagedappearin
theinstrumentpanel.
Thegearboxthenoperatesinauto-adaptive
mode,withoutanyactiononthepartofthe
driver.Itcontinuouslyselectsthemostsuitable
geartakingaccountof:
- optimisationoffuelconsumption,
- drivingstyle,
- roadconditions,
- vehicleload.
Foroptimumacceleration,when
overtakinganothervehicleforexample,
presstheacceleratorpedalfullydown,
beyondthepointofresistance.
Temporary control of gear
changing
Youcantemporarilytakeovercontrolofgear
changesusingthesteeringmounted"+"and"-"
controlpaddles:iftheenginespeedallows,the
gearchangeiscarriedout.
This function allows you to anticipate certain
situationssuchasovertakinganothervehicleor
approachingabend.
Afterafewmomentswithoutanyactiononthe
paddles,thegearboxresumescontrolofgear
changingautomatically.
Toengagereverse,thevehiclemustbe
immobilisedwithyourfootonthebrake.
F Press control R.
Theindicatorlampinthecontrolcomeson.
Reverse
Thereisanaudiblesignalon
engagementofreverse.
Ifreversegearisrequestedwhenmoving,
the Nwarninglampflashesandthegearbox
goesintoneutralautomatically.
Toengagereverse,stopthevehiclethen,with
yourfootonthebrakepedal,presscontrolN,
then R.
Donotpressthebrakeandaccelerator
pedalsatthesametime:thiscould
causeveryrapidwearoftheclutch.
88
Driving
Beforeswitchingofftheengine:
- presscontrolN to be in neutral,
or
- leavethevehicleingear;inthiscasethe
vehiclecannotbemoved.
Stopping the vehicle
Forallparkingsituations,youmust
apply the parking braketoimmobilise
thevehicle.
Whenimmobilisingthevehiclewith
theenginerunning,youmustselect
neutral N.
Operating fault
- - -appearsintheinstrumentpanel.
F Press control N.
F Pressthebrakepedal.
F Waitforaround30secondsuntilN or a
gearappearsintheinstrumentpanel.
F Press control D, then N.
F Withyourfootstillonthebrakepedal,start
theengine.
Thegearboxisoperationalagain.
Reinitialisation
(5-speed electronic
gearbox)
Followingdisconnectionofthebattery,itis
necessarytoreinitialisethegearbox.
F Switchontheignition.
Inexceptionalcircumstances,the
gearboxmayneedanautomatic
reinitialisation:startingandgear
changingarenolongerpossible.
- - -appearsintheinstrument
panel.
Followtheproceduredescribedabove.
Beforedoinganythingunderthebonnet,
ensure that control Nhasbeenpressed
andthattheparkingbrakeisapplied.
Withtheignitionon,illuminationof
thiswarninglamp,accompaniedby
anaudiblesignalandamessage,
indicatesagearboxfault.
HaveitcheckedbyaCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshop.
89
5
Driving
Hill start assist
Systemwhichkeepsyourvehicleimmobilised
temporarily(approximately2seconds)when
startingonagradient,thetimeittakesto
moveyourfootfromthebrakepedaltothe
acceleratorpedal.
Thissystemonlyoperateswhen:
- thevehicleiscompletelystationary,with
yourfootonthebrakepedal,
- certainconditionsofslopearemet,
- withthedriver’sdoorclosed.
Thehillstartassistsystemcannotbe
deactivated.
On an ascending slope, with the vehicle
stationary, the vehicle is held momentarily
when you release the brake pedal, provided
that:
- youareinfirstgearorneutralwitha
manualgearbox,
- youareinpositionD with an electronic
gearbox.
Operation
On a descending slope, with the vehicle
stationary and reverse gear engaged, the
vehicle is held momentarily when you
release the brake pedal.
Operating fault
Ifafaultinthesystemoccurs,thesewarning
lampscomeon,accompaniedbyanalert
message.ContactaCITROËNdealeror
aqualifiedworkshoptohavethesystem
checked.
Donotleavethevehiclewhileitisbeing
heldinthehillstartassistphase.
Ifyouneedtoexitthevehiclewith
theenginerunning,applytheparking
brake.
90
Driving
Stop & Start
Operation
Going into engine STOP mode
The "ECO"warninglampcomeson
intheinstrumentpanelandtheengine
goesintostandbyautomatically:
- with a manual gearbox, when stationary,
inneutral,andyoureleasetheclutch
pedal.
- with an electronic gearbox, when
stationaryoratspeedsbelow5mph
(8km/h)(dependingonversion),inneutral
(controlonN)orwhenyoupressthebrake
pedal.
NeverrefuelwiththeengineinSTOP
mode;youmustswitchofftheignition
withthebutton.
Foryourcomfort,duringparking
manoeuvres,STOPmodeisnot
availableforafewsecondsafter
comingoutofreversegear.
STOPmodedoesnotaffectthethe
vehicle'ssystems,suchasforexample,
braking,powersteering...
Special cases: STOP mode not
available
STOPmodeisnotinvokedprincipallywhen:
- thevehicleisonasteepslope(risingor
falling),
- thedriver'sdoorisopen,
- thedriver'sseatbeltisnotfastened,
- thevehiclehasnotexceeded6mph
(10km/h)sincethelastenginestartbythe
driver,
- theengineisneededtomaintaina
comfortabletemperatureinthepassenger
compartment,
- demistingisactive,
- somespecialconditions(batterycharge,
enginetemperature,brakingassistance,
ambienttemperature...)wheretheengineis
neededtoassurecontrolofasystem.
In this case, the "ECO"warning
lampflashesforafewsecondsthen
goesoff.
This operation is perfectly normal.
TheStop&Startsystemputstheenginetemporarilyintostandby-STOPmode-duringstopsinthetraffic(redlights,trafficjams,
orother...).Theenginerestartsautomatically-STARTmode-assoonasyouwanttomoveoff.Therestarttakesplaceinstantly,quickly
andsilently.
Perfectforurbanuse,theStop&Startsystemreducesfuelconsumptionandexhaustemissionsaswellasthenoiselevelwhen
stationary.
Stop & Start time counter
Acumulativetimecounterforperiods
inSTOPmodeduringajourney.
Itisdisplayedinthetripcomputer(accessible
via the "Driving assistance"menuofthe
touchscreentablet).
Itresetstozeroeverytimetheignitionisswitchedon.
91
5
Driving
Going into engine START mode
The "ECO"warninglampgoesoff
andtheenginestartsautomatically:
- with a manual gearbox, when you fully
depresstheclutchpedal.
- with an electronic gearbox:
● controlonD,whenyoureleasethebrake
pedal,
● controlonNandbrakepedalreleased,
when you press control D,
● whenyouengagereverse.
STARTmodeisinvokedautomaticallywhen:
- youopenthethedriver'sdoor,
- youunfastenthedriver'sseatbelt,
- thespeedofthevehicleexceeds7mph
(11km/h)withanelectronicgearbox,
- somespecialconditions(batterycharge,
enginetemperature,brakingassistance,
ambienttemperature...)wheretheengineis
neededforcontrolofasystem.
Special cases: START invoked
automatically
In this case the "ECO"warninglamp
flashesforafewseconds,thengoes
off.
This operation is perfectly normal.
Beforedoinganythingunderthe
bonnet,deactivatetheStop&Start
systemtoavoidanyriskofinjury
resultingfromautomaticoperationof
STARTmode.
Thissystemrequiresa12Vbatterywitha
specialspecificationandtechnology(reference
numbersavailablefromCITROËNdealers).
FittingabatterynotlistedbyCITROËN
introducestheriskofmalfunctionofthe
system.
Forcharging,usea12Vchargeranddonot
reversethepolarity.
Maintenance
TheStop&Startsystemmakesuseof
advancedtechnology.Foranyworkon
thesystemgotoaqualifiedworkshop
withtheskillsandequipmentrequired,
whichaCITROËNdealerisableto
provide.
92
Driving
Afaultwiththesystemissignalled
in the "Driving assistance"menu
(primarypage)ofthetouchscreen
tablet.
Operating fault
Intheeventofafaultwiththesystem,
thesymbolinthebuttonchangestoalert
modeandtheindicatorlampflashesfora
fewmomentsthenstaysoncontinuously.
If you press this button to reactivate the
system,theindicatorlampflashesagainfora
fewmomentsandthenstaysoncontinuously.
TheStop&Startsystemcanbedeactivatedin
thetouchscreentablet.
Deactivation
IfthesystemhasbeendeactivatedinSTOP
mode,theenginerestartsimmediately.
Whendrivingonafloodedroad,itis
recommendedthattheStop&Start
functionbedeactivatedandthatyou
driveveryslowly.
Thesystemcanbereactivatedinthetouch
screentablet.
Reactivation
Thesystemisreactivatedautomatically
everytimetheengineisstartedby
thedriver.
F Press on "Stop & Start".
F Select the "Driving assistance"
menu.
Theindicatorlampinthisbuttoncomeson
continuously.
Pressingthisbuttonagainreactivates
theStop&Startsystem.The
indicatorlampinthebuttongoesoff.
HaveitcheckedbyaCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshop.
IntheeventofafaultinSTOPmode,thevehicle
maystall.
Alloftheinstrumentpanelwarninglampscomeon.
Dependingonversion,analert
messagemayalsobedisplayed,asking
youtochangetoneutral(controlonN)
andputyourfootonthebrakepedal.
Youmustswitchofftheignition,then
starttheengineagain.
93
5
Driving
Steering mounted controls
6. Speedlimiteron/pauseindication.
7. Speedvaluesetting.
8. Speedlimitermodeselectionindication.
Speedlimiter
Systemwhichpreventsthevehiclefromexceedingthespeedprogrammedbythedriver.
Thespeedlimitercannot,inany
circumstances,replacetheneedto
observespeedlimits,norcanitreplacethe
needforvigilanceonthepartofthedriver.
1. Speedlimitermodeselectionwheel.
2. Valuedecreasebutton.
3. Valueincreasebutton.
4. Speedlimiteron/pausebutton.
5. Listofmemorisedspeedsdisplaybutton.
Display in the instrument panel
Theprogrammedspeedremainsinthesystem
memorywhentheignitionisswitchedoff.
94
Driving
Switching on / Pause
F Turn wheel 1 to the "LIMIT"position:the
speedlimitermodeisselectedbutisnot
switchedon(Pause).
F Switchthespeedlimiterbackonby
pressingbutton4,ifthespeeddisplayed
issuitable(bydefault,thelastspeed
programmed).
F Youcantemporarilystopthethespeed
limiterbypressingbutton4again:the
displayconfirmsthatithasbeenstopped
(Pause).
Afterfirstselectingspeedlimitermode(wheel1
in position "LIMIT"),youcanmodifythespeed
settingby:
- apressonbutton5:
Fthesixspeedsmemorisedaredisplayed
in the touch screen tablet,
Fchoosingaspeed:itisdisplayedinthe
instrumentpanel.
The selection screen closes after a few
moments.
Speedlimitscanbememorisedinthe
"Driving assistance"menu.
Formoreinformationonthelistof
memorisedspeeds,refertothe
"Memorisingspeeds"section.
Youdonothavetoswitchthespeed
limiteroninordertosetthespeed.
Thespeedlimiterisswitched on
manually:itrequiresaprogrammed
speedofatleast20mph(30km/h).
Adjusting the speed limit
setting
Or:
- usingbuttons2and3,increasingor
decreasingthespeeddisplayed:
Fbysuccessiveshortpresses,tomodify
by+or-½mph(1km/h),
Fbyamaintainedpress,tomodifyinsteps
of+or-3mph(5km/h).
95
5
Driving
On sharp acceleration, as when
descendingasteephill,thespeed
limiterwillnotbeabletoprevent
thevehiclefromexceedingthe
programmedspeed.
Thelimiteristemporarilydeactivated
andthedisplayedprogrammedspeed
flashes.
Anaudiblesignalaccompaniesthe
flashingoftheprogrammedspeed
whenexceedingthespeedisnotdueto
anactionbythedriver.
Theuseofmatsnotapprovedby
CITROËNmayinterferewiththe
operationofthespeedlimiter.
Toavoidanyriskofjammingofthe
pedals:
- ensurethatthematissecured
correctly,
- donotfitonematontopofanother.
Flashingofthedashesindicatesafaultwiththe
speedlimiter.
HaveitcheckedbyaCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshop.
Operating fault
Switching off
F Turn wheel 1 to the "0"position.
Thedisplayofinformationrelatedtothe
speedlimiterdisappears.
F Press firmlyontheacceleratorpedal,
goingbeyondthepoint of resistance, to
exceedtheprogrammedspeedlimit.
Thespeedlimiterisdeactivatedtemporarily
andthedisplayedprogrammedspeedflashes.
Temporarily exceeding the
programmed speed
Assoonasthevehicle'sspeedreturnstothe
programmedvalue,thelimiteroperatesagain:
thedisplayoftheprogrammedspeedsetting
becomessteadyagain.
Anaudiblesignalaccompaniesthe
flashingoftheprogrammedspeed
whenexceedingthespeedisnotdueto
anactionbythedriver(steephill...).
96
Driving
Steering mounted controls
6. Cruisecontrolpause/resumeindication.
7. Cruisespeedsetting.
8. Cruisecontrolmodeselectionindication.
Cruise control
Systemwhichautomaticallymaintainsthespeedofthevehicleatthevalueprogrammedbythedriver,withoutanyactionontheacceleratorpedal.
Thecruisecontrolsystemcannot,in
anycircumstances,replacetheneedto
observespeedlimits,norcanitreplacethe
needforvigilanceonthepartofthedriver.
Youareadvisedtokeepyourfeetnearthe
pedalsatalltimes.
1. Cruisecontrolmodeselectionwheel.
2. Decreasevalueorsetthecurrentspeedas
thespeedsetting.
3. Increasevalueorsetthecurrentspeedas
thespeedsetting.
4. Cruisecontrolpause/resumebutton.
5. Memorisedspeedsdisplaybutton.
Display in the instrument panel
Switchingofftheignitioncancelsany
programmedspeedvalue.
97
5
Driving
Switching on
Withthecruisecontrolswitchedon(ON),you
canthenmodifythespeedsettinginoneofthe
followingways:
- bypressingbutton5:
Fthesixmemorisedspeedsaredisplayed
in the the touch screen tablet,
Fpressingthethebuttonforthespeed
settingyouhavechosen.
Thevalueisthendisplayedinthe
instrumentpanel.
The selection screen closes after a few
moments.
Themodificationisthenaccepted.
F Turn wheel 1 to the "CRUISE"position:the
cruisecontrolmodeisselectedbutisnot
switchedon(Pause).
F Press button 2 or 3:yourvehicle'scurrent
speedbecomesthecruisespeed.
Thecruisecontrolisactivated(ON).
Modification of the speed
setting
The cruise control is switched on
manually:itrequiresaminimumvehicle
speedof25mph(40km/h).
Thememorisedspeedscanbe
programmedinthe"Driving
assistance"menu.
Formoreinformationonthelistof
memorisedspeeds,refertothe
"Memorisingspeeds"section.
Orby:
- usingbuttons2 or 3:
Fbysuccessiveshortpresses,tomodify
thespeedby+or-1mph(km/h),
Fbyalongpress,tomodifythespeedin
stepsof+or-5mph(km/h).
98
Driving
Flashingofthedashesindicatesafaultwiththe
cruisecontrol.
HaveitcheckedbyaCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshop.
Operating fault
Switching off
F Turn wheel 1 to the "0"position.
Thedisplayofinformationrelatedtothe
cruisecontroldisappears.
Whenthecruisecontrolisswitchedon,
becarefulifyoumaintainthepressure
ononeoftheprogrammedspeed
changingbuttons:thismayresultina
veryrapidchangeinthespeedofyour
vehicle.
Do not use the cruise control on
slipperyroadsorinheavytraffic.
Onasteepdescent,thecruisecontrol
will not be able to prevent the vehicle
fromexceedingtheprogrammedspeed.
Onsteepclimbsorwhentowing,the
programmedspeedmaynotbereached
ormaintained.
Theuseofmatsnotapprovedby
CITROËNmayinterferewiththe
operationofthecruisecontrol.
Toavoidanyriskofjammingofthe
pedals:
- ensurethatthematissecured
correctly,
- neverfitonematontopofanother.
Itispossibletoexceedtheprogrammedspeed
temporarilybypressingtheacceleratorpedal.
Toreturntotheprogrammedspeed,simply
releasetheacceleratorpedaluntilthe
programmedcruisespeedisreachedagain.
Exceeding the programmed
speed
Onceswitchedon,youcanpausethecruise
controlatanytimebypressingbutton4:the
screenconfirmsthepause.
Pause
Iftheprogrammedspeedisexceeded,
thedisplayedspeedflashes.
Oncethespeedofthevehiclereturns
totheprogrammedspeedsetting,the
displaybecomessteadyagain.
The cruise control is pausedmanually
orbypressingthebrakeorclutchpedal
oriftheESPsystemisinvokedfor
safetyreasons.
99
5
Driving
Memorisingspeeds
Memorising
Thisfunctionallowsspeedstobesaved,whichcanthenbeofferedtosetthetwosystems:thespeedlimiter(tolimitthespeedofthevehicle)
orthecruisecontrol(foravehiclecruisingspeed).
Youcanmemoriseuptosixspeedsettingsforeachofthetwosystems.Bydefault,somespeedsettingsarealready
memorised.
F Inthesecondarypage,press
"Speed settings".
Forsafetyreasons,thedrivermust
carry out these operations when
stationary.
F Selectthesystemforwhichyouwantto
memorisenewspeedsettings:
F Select the "Driving assistance"
menu.
F Enterthenewvalueusingthenumerical
keypadandconfirm.
F Confirmtosavethemodificationandquit
themenu.
● speedlimiter
or
● cruisecontrol.
F Pressthebuttoncorrespondingtothe
speedsettingyouwanttomodify.
This button allows you to restore the
factorysettings.
This function is accessible in the touch screen
tablet.
100
Driving
Thissystemindicatestheproximityofan
obstacle(person,vehicle,tree,gate,etc.)
whichcomeswithinthefieldofdetectionof
sensorslocatedinthebumper.
Certaintypesofobstacle(stake,roadworks
cone,etc.)detectedinitiallywillnolongerbe
detectedattheendofthemanoeuvredueto
thepresenceofblindspots.
Parkingsensors
This function cannot, in any
circumstances,taketheplaceofthe
vigilanceofthedriver.
Thesystemisswitchedonbyengagingreverse
gear.Thisisaccompaniedbyanaudiblesignal.
Thesystemisswitchedoffwhenyoucomeout
ofreversegear.
Audible assistance
Theproximityinformationisgivenbyan
intermittentaudiblesignal,thefrequencyofwhich
increasesasthevehicleapproachestheobstacle.
Thesoundemittedbythespeaker(rightorleft)
indicatesthesideonwhichtheobstacleislocated.
Whenthedistancebetweenthevehicleand
theobstaclebecomeslessthanapproximately
thirtycentimetres,theaudiblesignalbecomes
continuous.
Rear parking sensors
Visual assistance
Thissupplementstheaudiblesignalby
displayingbarsinthescreenortheinstrument
panelwhichmoveprogressivelynearerto
thevehicle.Whentheobstacleisnear,the
"Danger"symbolisdisplayed.
101
5
Driving
Front parking
sensors
Thesoundemittedbythespeaker(front
orrear)indicateswhethertheobstacle
isinfrontorbehind.
Thesystemwillbedeactivated
automaticallyifatrailerisbeing
towedorabicyclecarrierisfittedon
atowbar(vehiclefittedwithatowbar
installedinlinewiththemanufacturer's
recommendations).
Inbadweatherorinwinter,ensure
thatthesensorsarenotcoveredwith
mud,iceorsnow.Whenreversegearis
engaged,anaudiblesignal(longbeep)
indicatesthatthesensorsmaybedirty.
Certainsoundsources(motorcycle,
lorry,pneumaticdrill,etc.)maytrigger
theaudiblesignalsoftheparking
sensorsystem.
Inadditiontotherearparkingsensors,the
frontparkingsensorsaretriggeredwhenan
obstacleisdetectedinfrontandthespeedof
thevehicleisstillbelow6mph(10km/h).
Thefrontparkingsensorsareinterruptedif
thevehiclestopsformorethanthreeseconds
inforwardgear,ifnofurtherobstaclesare
detectedorwhenthespeedofthevehicle
exceeds6mph(10km/h).
Deactivation / Activation of the
front and rear parking sensors
Operating fault
Intheeventofamalfunctionof
thesystem,whenreversegearis
engagedthesymbolforthebutton
changestoalertmodeandthe
warninglampflashesforafew
momentsthenstaysoncontinuously.
Amessageappears,accompaniedbyan
audiblesignal(shortbeep).
ContactaCITROËNdealeroraqualified
workshop.
F Press on "Parking sensors".
Theindicatorlampinthebutton
comeson.
F Select the "Driving assistance"
menu.
High pressure jet wash
Whenwashingyourvehicle,donotdirectthe
lancewithin30cmofthesensors.
Pressingthisbuttonagainreactivatesthe
system.Theindicatorlampgoesoff.
Theparkingsensorscanbedeactivatedinthe
touchscreentablet.
Theparkingsensorsaredeactivated
whiletheParkAssistsystemis
measuringaspace.
Seethe"ParkAssist"section.
102
Driving
Reversingcamera
Cleanthereversingcameraregularly
usingasoft,drycloth.
Thereversingcameraisactivatedautomatically
whenreversegearisengaged.
Theimageisdisplayedinthetouchscreentablet.
The space between the blue lines represents
thewidthofyourvehicleexceptforthedoor
mirrors.
Thebluelinesrepresentthegeneraldirection
ofthevehicle.
Theredlinesrepresentadistanceofabout
30cmbeyondtheedgeofyourvehicle'srear
bumper.
Thegreenlinesrepresentdistancesofabout1
and2metresbeyondtheedgeofyourvehicle's
rearbumper.
Theturquoisebluecurvesrepresentthe
maximumturningcircle.
Thereversingcameracannotinany
circumstancesbeasubstituteforthe
vigilanceofthedriver.
Openingthetailgatecausesthedisplay
todisappear.
Thereversingcamerafunctionmaybe
completedwithparkingsensors.
High pressure jet washing
Whenwashingyourvehicle,donotdirectthe
lancewithin30cmofthecameralens.
103
5
Driving
ParkAssist
Thissystemprovidesactiveassistancewithparking,detectingaparkingspacethencontrollingthesteeringtoparkinthespace.
Itcontrolsthesteeringwhilethedrivermanagestheaccelerator,brakes,gearsandclutch(manualgearbox).Duringphasesofentryintoandexitfrom
aparkingspace,thesystemprovidesvisualandaudibleinformationtothedriverinordertomakethemanoeuvresafe.Itmaybenecessarytomove
forwardsandbackwardsmorethanonce.
TheParkAssistsystemcannotinany
circumstancesreplacetheneedfor
vigilanceonthepartofthedriver.
Thedrivermustremainincontrolof
theirvehicleensuringthatthespace
remainsclearduringthemanoeuvre.
Insomecircumstances,thesensors
maynotdetectsmallobstacleslocated
intheirblindspots.
Changingtyresizes(out-sizetyres,
wintertyres,...)caninterferewith
thecorrectoperationoftheparking
assistancesystem.
Duringamanoeuvrethesteeringwheel
turnsquickly:donotholdthesteering
wheel,donotplaceyourhandbetween
thespokesofthesteeringwheeland
takecarewithlooseandbulkyclothing,
scarves,handbags...Thereisariskof
injury.
Forentryintoaparkingspace(parallel
parking)thesystemdoesnotdetect
spaceswhichareclearlymuchsmaller
orlargerthanthesizeofthevehicle.
This"parkingassistance"system
isactivatedautomaticallyduring
manoeuvres;itisthereforepossible
thatasymbolcomesoninthescreen,
accompaniedbyanaudiblesignal,
withoutaffectingthemanoeuvre.
Theselectionofthetypeofmanoeuvre
(enteringorexitingaparallelparking
space)preventsachangetoSTOP
modeofStop&Start.
InSTOPmode,thisselectionrestarts
theengine.
Thedrivercantakecontrolatanytimebygrippingthesteeringwheel.
Thesystemprovidesassistanceinenteringand
exitingaparkingspacewhenparallelparking.
104
Driving
Entering a parallel parking space
F Whenyouhaveidentifiedafreespace,
reducethespeedofthevehicletoa
maximumof12mph(20km/h).
F Positionyourvehiclebeforethisspace.
ToactivatetheParkAssistsystem:
OR
Amessageisdisplayedinthescreen.
F Selecttheenterparkingspacemanoeuvre.
Theindicatorlampinthecontrolcomeson.
F Operatethedirectionindicatoronthe
parkingside.
F Moveforwardsalongsidetheparking
spaceataspeedbelow12mph(20km/h)
tomeasureit,keepingatadistanceof
between0.5and1.5metresfromtherowof
parkedvehicles.
Oncemeasurementiscomplete,ifthespaceis
largeenoughamessageindicatesthatparking
ispossible.
F Select the "Driving assistance"
menuinthetouchscreentablet.
F Inthesecondarypage,presson
"Park Assist".
F Pressthiscontroltoactivatethesystem.
Theindicatorlampinthecontrolremainsoff.
105
5
Driving
Theassistedparkingmanoeuvreisinprogress.
Withoutexceeding5mph(8km/h),continue
themanoeuvresfollowingtheinformationgiven
bythe"parkingassistance"system,untilthe
endofmanoeuvremessageisdisplayed.
Theindicatorlampinthecontrolgoesoff,
accompaniedbyaaudiblesignal.
Thedrivertakesbackcontrolofthevehicle's
steering.
F Moveyourvehicleforwarduntilanew
messageisdisplayed.
F Selectreverseandreleasethesteering
wheel.
106
Driving
Exit from a parallel parking space
Withthevehiclestationary,toactivatethePark
Assistsystem:
F Whenyouwanttoexitfromaparallel
parkingspace,starttheengine.
Theassistedexitfromparkingmanoeuvreisin
progress.
Withoutexceeding5mph(8km/h),continuethe
manoeuvresfollowingtheinformationgivenby
the"parkingassistance"system,untiltheendof
manoeuvremessageisdisplayed.
Themanoeuvreiscompleteoncethefrontwheels
ofthevehicleareoutoftheparkingspace.
Theindicatorlampinthecontrolgoesoff,
accompaniedbyaaudiblesignal.
Thedrivertakesbackcontrolofthevehicle's
steering.
OR
Amessageisdisplayedinthescreen.
F Selecttheexitparkingspacemanoeuvre.
Theindicatorlampinthecontrolcomeson.
F Operatethedirectionindicatorontheexit
fromparkingside.
Thedirectionindicatorwarninglamp
flashesintheinstrumentpanelthroughout
themanoeuvre,whateverthepositionof
thestalk.
F Selectaforwardorreversegearthen
releasethesteeringwheel.
F Select the "Driving assistance"
menuinthetouchscreentablet.
F Inthesecondarypage,presson
"Park Assist".
F Pressthiscontrol.
Theindicatorlampinthecontrolremainsoff.
107
5
Driving
Inbadweatherandinwinter,ensure
thatthesensorsarenotcoveredby
roaddirt,iceorsnow.
Intheeventofafault,havethesystem
checkedbyaCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshop.
Ifthesystemisdeactivatedduringa
manoeuvre,thedriveshouldreactivate
ittorepeatthemeasurement.
Ifthelateraldistancebetweenyourvehicle
andthespaceistoogreat,thesystemmay
notbeabletomeasurethespace.
Anythingprojectingbeyondtheenvelopeof
thevehicle(longorwideload)isnottaken
intoaccountbytheParkAssistsystem
duringamanoeuvre.
Deactivation
Amessageisdisplayedinthescreen.
Thedriverthentakesbackcontrolofthe
vehicle'ssteering.
Thesystemisdeactivatedbypressingthe
ParkAssistcontrol(ortheParkAssistbutton
in the "Driving assistance"menuofthetouch
screentablet),
Thesystemisdeactivatedautomatically:
- onswitchingofftheignition,
- iftheenginestalls,
- ifnomanoeuvreisstartedwithin5minutes
ofselectionofthetypeofmanoeuvre,
- afteraprolongedstopofthevehicleduring
amanoeuvre,
- iftheroadwheelanti-spinregulation(ASR)
systemisinvoked,
- ifthespeedofthevehicleexceedsthe
statedlimit,
- whenthedriverinterruptsmovementofthe
steeringwheel,
- ifthedriverpressestheParkAssistcontrol
(ortheParkAssistbuttonoftheDriving
assistancemenuinthetouchscreen
tablet),
- ifcorrectpositioningofthevehicleisnot
possible(toomanymanoeuvresneededto
insertorextractthevehicle),
- ifthedriver'sdoorisopen,
- ifoneofthefrontwheelsencountersan
obstacle.
Switching off
Thesystemisswitchedoffautomatically:
- whentowingatrailer,
- ifthedriver'sdoorisopened,
- ifthespeedofthevehicleisabove42mph
(70km/h).
Toswitchthesystemofforaprolongedperiod,
contactaCITROËNdealeroraqualified
workshop.
Operating faults
Intheeventofafaultwiththesystem,
thesymbolinthebutton(locatedin
thetouchscreentablet)changesto
alertmodeandthewarninglamp
flashesandthengoesoff.
ContactaCITROËNdealeroraqualified
workshop.
108
Visibility
Lightingcontrol
Systemforselectionandcontrolofthevariousfrontandrearlampsprovidingthevehicle'slighting.
Main lighting
Thevariousfrontandrearlampsofthevehicle
aredesignedtoadaptthedriver'svisibility
progressivelyaccordingtotheclimatic
conditions:
- sidelamps,tobeseen,
- dippedbeamheadlampstoseewithout
dazzlingotherdrivers,
- mainbeamheadlampstoseeclearlywhen
theroadisclear.
Additional lighting
Otherlampsareprovidedtomeetthe
requirementsofparticulardrivingconditions:
- arearfoglamp,
- frontfoglampswithcorneringlighting,
- daytimerunninglampstobemorevisible
duringtheday,
- guide-me-homelightingtofacilitateyour
exitfromthevehicle,
- parkinglampsasvehiclepositionmarkers.
Intheeventofthefailureofoneormore
bulbs,amessageadvisesyoutocheck
thelamp(s)inquestion.
109
6
Visibility
Model without AUTO lighting
Model with AUTO lighting
Selection ring for main lighting
mode
Turntheringtopositionthesymbolrequired
facingthemark.
Lightingoff/Daytimerunninglamps.
Automaticilluminationofheadlamps.
Sidelampsonly.
Dippedormainbeamheadlamps.
Dipping the headlamps
Pullthestalktoswitchthelightingbetween
dipped/mainbeamheadlamps.
Inthelightingoffandsidelampsmodes,the
drivercanswitchonthemainbeamheadlamps
temporarily("headlampflash")bymaintaininga
pullonthestalk.
Displays
Illuminationofthecorrespondingindicatorlamp
intheinstrumentpanelconfirmsthelighting
switchedon.
110
Visibility
Foglamp selection ring
Thefoglampsoperatewithdippedandmainbeamheadlamps.
Front foglamps and rear
foglamp
Whentheheadlampsswitchoffwithautomatic
illuminationofheadlamps(AUTOmodel)
orwhenthedippedbeamheadlampsare
switchedoffmanually,thefoglampsand
sidelampsremainon.
F Turntheringrearwardstoswitchoffthe
foglamps,thesidelampswillthenswitch
off.
Rear foglamp only
F Toswitchiton,turntheringforwards.
Whenthelightingisswitchedoffautomatically
(withAUTOmodel),thefoglampandthedipped
beamheadlampswillremainon.
F Toswitchitoff,turntheringrearwards.
Rotateandreleasethering:
F forwardsafirsttimetoswitchonthefront
foglamps,
F forwardsasecondtimetoswitchonthe
rearfoglamp,
F rearwardsafirsttimetoswitchofftherear
foglamp,
F rearwardsasecondtimetoswitchofthe
frontfoglamps.
111
6
Visibility
Ingoodorrainyweather,bothday
andnight,thefrontfoglampsandthe
rearfoglampareprohibited.Inthese
situations,thepoweroftheirbeams
maydazzleotherdrivers.Theyshould
onlybeusedinfogorsnow.
Intheseweatherconditions,itisyour
responsibilitytoswitchonthefoglamps
anddippedbeamheadlampsmanually
asthesunshinesensormaydetect
sufficientlight.
Donotforgettoswitchoffthefront
foglampsandtherearfoglampwhen
theyarenolongernecessary.
Switching off the lamps
when the ignition is
switched off
Onswitchingofftheignition,allofthelamps
turnoffimmediately,exceptfordippedbeam
ifguide-me-homelightingisactivated.
Switching on the lamps
after the ignition is
switched off
Toreactivatethelightingcontrol,rotate
theringtothe"0"position-lampsoff,
thentothedesiredposition.
Onopeningthedriver'sdoora
temporaryaudiblesignalwarnsthe
driverthatthelightingison.
Thelamps,withtheexceptionofthe
sidelamps,switchoffautomaticallyafter
amaximumdurationofthirtyminutesto
preventdischargingofthebattery.
112
Visibility
Automatic illumination
of headlamps
Activation
F Turntheringtothe"AUTO"position.The
activationofthefunctionisaccompanied
bythedisplayofamessage.
Whenalowlevelofambientlightisdetected
byasunshinesensor,thenumberplate
lamps,sidelampsanddippedbeamheadlamps
areswitchedonautomatically,withoutany
actiononthepartofthedriver.Theycanalso
comeonifrainisdetected,atthesametimeas
automaticoperationofthewindscreenwipers.
Assoonasthebrightnessreturnstoa
sufficientlevelorafterthewindscreenwipers
areswitchedoff,thelampsareswitchedoff
automatically.
Deactivation
F Turntheringtoanotherposition.
Deactivation of the function is
accompaniedbythedisplayofamessage.
Operating fault
Intheeventofamalfunctionofthe
sunshinesensor,thelightingcomes
on,thiswarninglampisdisplayed
Infogorsnow,thesunshinesensor
maydetectsufficientlight.Inthis
case,thelightingwillnotcomeon
automatically.
Do not cover the sunshine sensor,
coupledwiththerainsensorand
locatedinthecentreofthewindscreen
behindtherearviewmirror;the
associatedfunctionswouldnolonger
becontrolled.
ContactaCITROËNdealeroraqualified
workshop.
intheinstrumentpanelaccompaniedbyan
audiblesignaland/oramessage.
113
6
Visibility
Daytime running lamps / Sidelamps
(LEDs)
Thelight-emittingdiodes(LEDs)comeon
automaticallywhentheengineisstarted.
Insomeweatherconditions(e.g.low
temperatureorhumidity),thepresence
ofmistingontheinternalsurfaceofthe
glassoftheheadlampsandrearlamps
isnormal;itdisappearsafterthelamps
havebeenonforafewminutes.
Theyprovidethefollowingfunctions:
- Daytimerunninglamps(lightingcontrol
stalkinposition"0" or "AUTO" with
adequatelightlevel).
- Sidelamps(lightingcontrolstalkin
position "AUTO"withlowlightlevelor
"Sidelampsonly"or"Mainordippedbeam
headlamps").
TheLEDsarebrighterwhenoperating
asdaytimerunninglamps.
114
Visibility
Parking lamps
Switching on
F Withtheignitionoff,"flash"theheadlamps
usingthelightingstalk.
F Afurther"headlampflash"switchesthe
functionoff.
Switching off
Themanualguide-me-homelightingswitches
offautomaticallyafterasettime.
Thetemporaryilluminationofthedippedbeam
headlampsafterthevehicle'signitionhasbeen
switchedoffmakesthedriver'sexiteasier
whenthelightispoor.
Sidemarkersforthevehiclebyilluminationof
thesidelampsonthetrafficsideonly.
F Dependingonversion,withinoneminute
ofswitchingofftheignition,operatethe
lightingcontrolstalkupordowndepending
onthetrafficside(forexample:when
parkingontheleft;lightingcontrolstalk
upwards;therighthandsidelampsareon).
Thisisconfirmedbyanaudiblesignaland
illuminationofthecorrespondingdirection
indicatorwarninglampintheinstrumentpanel.
Toswitchofftheparkinglamps,returnthe
lightingcontrolstalktothecentralposition.
Guide-me-home lighting
Automatic
Whentheautomaticilluminationofheadlamps
isactivated,iftheambientlightlevelislow,
dippedbeamcomesonautomaticallywhen
switchingofftheignition.
Activationordeactivationofthesystem,aswell
astheperiodfortheguide-me-homelighting
aresetinthetouchscreentablet.
F Select the "Driving assistance"
menu.
F Inthesecondarypage,press
"Vehicle settings".
Manual
115
6
Visibility
Headlampadjustment
Toavoidcausinganuisancetootherroad
users,theheightoftheheadlampsshouldbe
adjustedinrelationtotheloadinthevehicle.
Theinitialsettingisposition"0".
Travelling abroad
Thedesignofthedippedbeam
headlampsallows,withoutmodification,
drivinginacountrythatdrivesonthe
othersideoftheroadtothecountryin
whichyourvehiclewassold.
0. Driver only
ordriver+frontpassenger.
-. Driver+frontpassenger+rear
passengers.
1. Driver+frontpassenger+rearpassengers+
loadintheboot.
-. Driver+frontpassenger+rearpassengers+
loadintheboot.
2. Driveronly+maximumauthorisedloadin
theboot.
Thispositionissufficienttoavoidcausingdazzle.
Highersettingsmaylimitthespreadoflight
fromtheheadlamps.
116
Visibility
Corneringlighting
Withdippedormainbeams,thissystem
makesuseofthebeamfromafrontfoglamp
toilluminatetheinsideofabend,whenthe
vehiclespeedisbelow25mph(approximately
40km/h)(urbandriving,windingroad,
intersections,parkingmanoeuvres...).
With corneringlighting
Without corneringlighting
Switching on
Thissystemstarts:
- whenthecorrespondingdirectionindicator
isswitchedon,
or
- fromacertainangleofrotationofthe
steeringwheel.
Switching off
Thesystemdoesnotoperate:
- belowacertainangleofrotationofthe
steeringwheel,
- above25mph(40km/h),
- whenreversegearisengaged.
117
6
Visibility
Wipercontrolstalk
Manual controls
Thewipersarecontrolleddirectlybythedriver.
Model with AUTO wiping
Model with manual wiping
Windscreen wipers
Wipingspeedcontrolstalk:raiseorlowerthe
stalktothedesiredposition.
Fastwipe(heavyrain).
Normalwipe(moderaterain).
Intermittentwipe(proportionaltothe
speedofthevehicle).
Park.
Singlewipe(pressdownwardsorpull
thestalkbrieflytowardsyou,then
release).
or
Automaticwiping(pressdown,
thenrelease)orsinglewipe
(pullthestalkbrieflytowardsyou).
Donotoperatethewipersonadry
windscreen.Underextremelyhotor
coldconditions,ensurethatthewiper
bladesarenotstucktothewindscreen
beforeoperatingthewipers.
Inwintryconditions,removesnow,ice
orfrostpresentonthewindscreen,
aroundthewiperarmsandbladesand
thewindscreenseal,beforeoperating
thewipers.
118
Visibility
Rear wiper
Park.
Ifasignificantaccumulationofsnowor
iceispresent,orwhenusingabicycle
carrierontheboot,deactivatethe
automaticrearwiper.
Intermittentwipe.
Wash-wipe(setduration).
Rearwiperselectionring:
Reverse gear
Whenreversegearisengaged,therearwiper
willcomeintooperationautomaticallyifthe
windscreenwipersareoperating.
Activationordeactivationofthisautomatic
functioncanbesetinthetouchscreentablet.
Windscreen wash
Pullthewiperstalktowardsyou.
Thewindscreenwash,thenthewindscreen
wipers,operateforapre-determinedtime.
Yourvehicleisfittedwithaninnovative
windscreenwashsystem.
Thescreenwashfluidissprayedall
alongthelengthofthewiperblade,so
avoidingimpairmentofthedriver'sview
orthatofthepassengers.
F Select the "Driving assistance"
menu.
F Inthesecondarypage,press
"Vehicle settings".
Thisfunctionisactivatedbydefault.
119
6
Visibility
Thewindscreenwipersoperateautomatically,
withoutanyactiononthepartofthedriver,if
rainisdetected(sensorbehindtherearview
mirror),adaptingtheirspeedtotheintensityof
therainfall.
Switching on
Switching off
Theautomaticrainsensitivewindscreen
wipersmustbereactivatedbypushing
thecontrolstalkdownwards,ifthe
ignitionhasbeenoffformorethan
oneminute.
Brieflypushthecontrolstalk
downwards.
Awipingcycleconfirmsthatthe
instructionhasbeenaccepted.
Thiswarninglampcomesoninthe
instrumentpanelandamessageis
displayed.
Brieflypushthecontrolstalk
downwardsagain,orplace
thecontrolstalkinanother
position(Int,1or2).
Automatic rain sensitive
windscreen wipers
Thiswarninglampgoesoffintheinstrument
panelandamessageisdisplayed.
120
Visibility
Special position of the
windscreen wipers
Tomaintaintheeffectivenessoftheflat
wiperblades,itisadvisableto:
- handlethemwithcare,
- cleanthemregularlyusingsoapy
water,
- avoidusingthemtoretain
cardboardonthewindscreen,
- replacethematthefirstsignsof
wear.
Thispositionpermitsreleaseofthewindscreen
wiperblades.
Itisusedforcleaningorreplacementofthe
blades.Itcanalsobeuseful,inwinter,to
detachthebladesfromthewindscreen.
Donotcovertherainsensor,linkedwith
thesunshinesensorandlocatedinthe
centreofthewindscreenbehindtherear
viewmirror.
Switchofftheautomaticrainsensitive
wiperswhenusinganautomaticcarwash.
Inwinter,itisadvisabletowaituntilthe
windscreeniscompletelyclearofice
beforeactivatingtheautomaticrain
sensitivewipers.
Operating fault
Ifafaultoccurswiththeautomaticrain
sensitive wipers, the wipers will operate in
intermittentmode.
HaveitcheckedbyCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshop.
F Anyactiononthewiperstalkintheminute
afterswitchingofftheignitionplacesthe
bladesverticallyonthescreen.
F Toparkthebladesagain,switchonthe
ignitionandoperatethewiperstalk.
121
6
Visibility
Panoramicsunroof
Thisglazedroofprovidesincreasedvisibility
andlightinthepassengercompartment,while
maintainingnormaltemperaturesthankstoits
"highthermalprotection"coating.
Advice on care
Inordertopreservethepropertiesofthe
glazedroof,werecommendthatyouwipeor
cleantheinnerglassusingaclean,softand
drycloth.
Forstubbornstains,theglassshouldbe
cleanedusingscreenwashfluid,rinsedwith
cleanwater,thendriedwithaclean,softcloth.
Do not use soapy water, abrasive
products,detergents(particularlythose
withanammoniabase),solvents,
solutionswithahighconcentrationof
alcohol,petrol,...
122
Visibility
Courtesylamp
1. Courtesy lamp
2. Map reading lamps
F Withtheignitionon,pressthe
correspondingswitch.
Map reading lamps
Withthe"permanentlighting"mode,
thelightingtimevariesaccordingtothe
circumstances:
-
withtheignitionoff,approximatelytenminutes,
-
inenergyeconomymode,approximately
thirtyseconds,
-
withtheenginerunning,unlimited.
Inthisposition,thecourtesylamp
comesongradually:
Permanentlyoff.
Permanentlighting.
- whenthevehicleisunlocked,
- whenthekeyisremovedfromtheignition,
- whenopeningadoor,
- whentheremotecontrollockingbuttonis
pressed,inordertolocateyourvehicle.
Takecaretoavoidleavinganythingin
contactwiththecourtesylamp.
Courtesy lamp
Itswitchesoffgradually:
- whenthevehicleislocked,
- whentheignitionisswitchedon,
- 30secondsafterthelastdoorisclosed.
123
6
Visibility
Thiscomesonautomaticallywhenthebootis
openedandswitchesoffautomaticallywhen
thebootisclosed.
Differentlightingtimesareprovided:
- whentheignitionisoff,approximately
tenminutes,
- inenergyeconomymode,approximately
thirtyseconds,
- whentheengineisrunning,nolimit.
Bootlamp
Brightnessofinstrumentsandcontrols
Lighting dimmer control
Allowsthemanualadjustmentofthebrightness
oftheinstrumentandcontrolsillumination,to
suittheambientlightlevel.
F Select the "Configuration"
menu.
F Adjustthebrightnessbypressingon
the "+" or "-"buttonsorbymovingthe
cursor.
Operatesonlywhenthesidelampsare
on.
Black screen
(Touch screen tablet)
This function is accessible in the touch screen
tablet.
F Select the "Configuration"
menu.
F Press "Turn off screen".
This function is accessible in the touch screen
tablet.
Thescreeninthethetouchscreentabletgoes
off.
Pressthescreenagain(anywhereonits
surface)toswitchitonagain.
124
Safety
Directionindicators
F Left:lowerthelightingstalkpassingthe
pointofresistance.
F Right:raisethelightingstalkpassingthe
pointofresistance.
Three ashes of the direction
indicators
F Pressbrieflyupwardsordownwards,
withoutgoingbeyondthepointof
resistance;thedirectionindicatorswill
flash3times.
Hazardwarninglamps
Avisualwarningbymeansofthedirection
indicatorstoalertotherroaduserstoavehicle
breakdown,towingoraccident.
F Pressthisbutton,thedirectionindicators
flash.
Theycanoperatewiththeignitionoff.
Automatic operation of
hazard warning lamps
Whenbrakinginanemergency,dependingon
thedeceleration,thehazardwarninglamps
comeonautomatically.
Theyswitchoffautomaticallythefirsttimeyou
accelerate.
F Youcanalsoswitchthemoffbypressing
thebutton.
125
7
Safety
Thissystemallowsyoutomakeanemergency
orassistancecalltotheemergencyservicesor
tothededicatedCITROËNservice.
Emergencyor
assistance call
Formoreinformationontheuseofthis
function,refertothe"Audioandtelematics"
section.
Horn
F Pressthecentralpartofthesteering
wheel.
126
Safety
Under-inationdetection
Thesystemmonitorsthepressuresinthefour
tyres,oncethevehicleismoving.
Itcomparestheinformationgivenbythefour
wheelspeedsensorswithreference values,
which must be reinitialised every time the
tyre pressures are adjusted or a wheel
changed.
Thesystemtriggersanalertassoonasit
detectsadropintheinflationpressureofone
ormoretyres.
Theunder-inflationdetectionsystem
doesnotreplacetheneedforvigilance
onthepartofthedriver.
Thissystemdoesnotavoidtheneedto
checkthetyrepressures(includingthe
sparewheel)everymonthaswellas
beforealongjourney.
Drivingwithunder-inflatedtyresimpairs
roadholding,extendsbrakingdistances
andcausesprematuretyrewear,
particularlyunderarduouscondition
(highloading,highspeed,longjourney).
Systemwhichautomaticallychecksthepressuresofthetyreswhiledriving.
Theinflationpressuresdefinedfor
yourvehiclecanbefoundonthetyre
pressurelabel.
Seethe"Identificationmarkings"
section.
Tyrepressuresshouldbechecked
whenthetyresare"cold"(vehicle
stoppedfor1hourorafterajourneyof
lessthan6miles(10km)atmoderate
speeds).
Otherwise(whenhot),add0.3barto
thepressuresshownonthelabel.
Drivingwithunder-inflatedtyres
increasesfuelconsumption.
127
7
Safety
Under-inflation alert Reinitialisation
Beforereinitialisingthesystem,ensure
that the pressures of the four tyres are
correctfortheuseofthevehicleandin
linewiththerecommendationsonthe
tyrepressurelabel.
Theunder-inflationdetectionsystem
doesnotgiveawarningifapressureis
incorrectatthetimeofreinitialisation.
Thisisgivenbyfixedilluminationof
thiswarninglamp,accompaniedby
anaudiblesignalandthedisplayofa
message.
Itisnecessarytoreinitialisethesystemevery
timeoneormoretyrepressureisadjusted,and
afterchangingoneormorewheels.
Alabelattachedtothemiddlepillar,driver's
side,givesareminderofthis.
F Reducespeedimmediately,avoid
excessivesteeringmovementsandsudden
braking.
F Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to
doso.
F Ifyouhaveacompressor(suchastheone
inthetemporarypuncturerepairkit),check
thepressuresofthefourtyreswhencold.
Ifitisnotpossibletocarryoutthischeck
straightaway,drivecarefullyatreduced
speed.
or
F In the event of a puncture, use the
temporarypuncturerepairkitorthespare
wheel(dependingonequipment),
Thelossofpressuredetecteddoesnot
alwayscausevisiblebulgingofthetyre.
Donotsatisfyyourselfwithjustavisual
check.
Thealertismaintaineduntilthesystem
isreinitialised.
128
Safety
Reinitialisationofthesystemisdoneinthethe
touchscreentablet,withtheignitiononandthe
vehiclestationary.
F Inthesecondarypage,press
"Under-inflation initialisation".
F Confirmtheinstructionbypressing"Yes",
anaudiblesignalandamessageconfirm
thereinitialisation.
Thenewpressuresettingsregisteredare
consideredtobereferencevaluesbythe
system.
Operating fault
Theflashingandthenfixedilluminationofthe
under-inflationwarninglampaccompanied
byilluminationofthe"service"warninglamp
indicatesafaultwiththesystem.
Inthiscase,under-inflationmonitoringofthe
tyresisnolongerassured.
HavethesystemcheckedbyaCITROËN
dealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
Beforedoinganythingtothesystem,
thepressuresofthefourtyresmustbe
checkedandthesystemreinitialised.
Theunder-inflationalertcanonlybe
consideredreliableifreinitialisationof
thesystemisdonewiththethefourtyre
pressurescorrectlyset.
Snow chains
Thesystemdoesnothavetobe
reinitialisedafterfittingorremoving
snowchains.
F Select the "Driving assistance"
menu.
129
7
Safety
ElectronicStabilityControl(ESC)incorporating
thefollowingsystems:
- anti-lockbrakingsystem(ABS)andthe
electronicbrakeforcedistribution(EBFD),
- emergencybrakingassistance(EBA),
- wheelanti-slipregulation(ASR)ortraction
control,
- dynamicstabilitycontrol(DSC).
Electronicstabilitycontrol(ESC)
Definitions
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
and electronic brake force
distribution (EBFD)
Thissystemimprovesthestabilityand
manoeuvrabilityofyourvehiclewhenbraking
andcontributestowardsimprovedcontrolin
corners,inparticularonpoororslipperyroad
surfaces.
TheABSpreventswheellockintheeventof
emergencybraking.
Theelectronicbrakeforcedistributionsystem
managesthebrakingpressurewheelbywheel.
Emergency braking assistance
(EBA)
Inanemergency,thissystemenablesyouto
reachtheoptimumbrakingpressuremore
quicklyandthereforereducethestopping
distance.
Itistriggeredaccordingtothespeedatwhich
thebrakepedalispressed.Thisisfeltbya
reductionintheresistanceofthepedalandan
increaseintheeffectivenessofthebraking.
Anti-slip regulation (ASR)
TheASRsystem(alsoknownasTraction
Control)optimisestractioninordertolimit
wheelslipbyactingonthebrakesofthedriving
wheelsandontheengine.Italsoimproves
thedirectionalstabilityofthevehicleon
acceleration.
Dynamic stability control (DSC)
Ifthereisadifferencebetweenthepath
followedbythevehicleandthatrequiredby
thedriver,theDSCmonitorseachwheeland
automaticallyactsonthebrakeofoneormore
wheelsandontheenginetoreturnthevehicle
totherequiredpath,withinthelimitsofthelaws
ofphysics.
130
Safety
Whenthiswarninglampcomeson,
coupledwiththeSTOPwarninglamp,
accompaniedbyanaudiblesignalanda
message,itindicatesthatthereisafault
withtheelectronicbrakeforcedistribution
(EBFD),whichcouldcauselossofcontrol
ofthevehiclewhenbraking.
Operation
Whenthiswarninglampcomeson,
accompaniedbyanaudiblesignal
andamessage,itindicatesthatthere
isafaultwiththeABS,whichcould
cause loss of control of the vehicle
whenbraking.
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
and electronic brake force
distribution (EBFD)
Whenchangingwheels(tyresandrims),
makesurethattheseareapprovedfor
yourvehicle.
NormaloperationoftheABSmaymake
itselffeltbyslightvibrationsofthebrake
pedal.
In emergency braking, press
very firmly without releasing the
pressure.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Inbothcases,contactaCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshop.
131
7
Safety
Dynamic stability control (DSC)
and anti-slip regulation (ASR)
TheDSCsystemoffersexceptional
safetyinnormaldriving,butthisshould
notencouragethedrivertotakeextra
risksordriveathighspeed.
Thecorrectoperationofthesystem
dependsonobservationofthe
manufacturer'srecommendations
regardingthewheels(tyresandrims),
thebrakingcomponents,theelectronic
componentsandtheassemblyand
repairproceduresusedbyCITROËN
dealers.
Afteranimpact,havethesystem
checkedbyaCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshop.
Activation
Thesesystemsareactivatedautomatically
eachtimethevehicleisstarted.
Assoonastheydetectaproblemofgripor
trajectory,thesesystemsactontheoperationif
theengineandbrakes.
Deactivation
Inexceptionalconditions(startingavehicle
whichisboggeddown,stuckinsnow,onsoft
ground...),itmaybeadvisabletodeactivate
theDSCsystem,sothatthewheelscanmove
freelyandregaingrip.
Thisisindicatedbyflashingofthis
warninglampintheinstrumentpanel.
Operating fault
Butitisrecommendedthatthesystembe
reactivatedassoonaspossible.
F Pressthebutton.
Thiswarninglampandtheindicatorlamp
inthebuttoncomeon:theDSCsystemno
longeractsontheoperationoftheengine.
Reactivation
Thesystemisreactivatedautomaticallyeach
timetheignitionisswitchedbackonorfrom
30mph(50km/h).
F Pressthebuttonagainto
reactivateitmanually.
Ifthiswarninglampcomeson,
accompaniedbyanaudiblesignal
andamessage,thisindicatesafault
withthesystem.
ContactaCITROËNdealeroraqualified
workshoptohavethesystemchecked.
132
Safety
Seat belts
Front seat belts
Thefrontseatbeltsarefittedwitha
pretensioningandforcelimitingsystem.
Thissystemimprovessafetyinthefront
seatsintheeventofafrontorsideimpact.
Dependingontheseverityoftheimpact,the
pretensioningsysteminstantlytightenstheseat
beltsagainstthebodyoftheoccupants.
Thepretensioningseatbeltsareactivewhen
theignitionison.
Theforcelimiterreducesthepressureofthe
seat belt on the chest of the occupant, so
improvingtheirprotection.
Fastening
F Pullthestrap,theninsertthetongueinthe
buckle.
F Checkthattheseatbeltisfastened
correctlybypullingthestrap.
Unfastening
F Presstheredbuttononthebuckle.
F Guidetheseatbeltasitreelsin.
Rear seat belts
Therearseatsareeachfittedwithathree-point
seatbelt.
133
7
Safety
Fromapproximately12mph
(20km/h),thewarninglamp(s)
flashfortwominutesaccompanied
byanaudiblesignal.Oncethese
twominuteshaveelapsed,the
warninglamp(s)remainonuntilthe
driverorfrontpassengerfastenstheir
seatbelt.
Seat belt not fastened /
unfastened warning lamps
Front seat belt warning lamps
Onswitchingontheignition,warning
lamp1comesonintheinstrument
panelandthecorrespondingwarning
lamp(2and3)comesoninredin
thepassenger'sseatbeltandfront
airbagwarninglampdisplayifthe
driver'sseatbeltorfrontpassenger's
seatbeltisnotfastenedoris
unfastened.
1. Frontseatbeltsnotfastened/unfastened
warninglampintheinstrumentpanel.
2. Frontleftseatbeltwarninglamp.
3. Frontrightseatbeltwarninglamp.
4. Rearrightseatbeltwarninglamp.
5. Rearcentreseatbeltwarninglamp.
6. Rearleftseatbeltwarninglamp.
Rear seat belt warning lamps
Thecorrespondingwarning
lamp(4 to 6)comesoninredinthe
seatbeltandfrontairbagwarning
lampdisplayifoneormorerear
passengersunfastentheirseatbelt.
134
Safety
Thedrivermustensurethatpassengersuse
theseatbeltscorrectlyandthattheyareall
restrainedsecurelybeforesettingoff.
Whereveryouareseatedinthevehicle,
always fasten your seat belt, even for short
journeys.
Donotinterchangetheseatbeltbucklesas
theywillnotfulfiltheirrolefully.
Theseatbeltsarefittedwithaninertiareel
permittingautomaticadjustmentofthe
lengthofthestraptoyoursize.Theseatbelt
isstowedautomaticallywhennotinuse.
Beforeandafteruse,ensurethattheseat
beltisreeledincorrectly.
Thelowerpartofthestrapmustbe
positionedaslowaspossibleonthepelvis.
Theupperpartmustbepositionedinthe
hollowoftheshoulder.
Theinertiareelsarefittedwithanautomatic
lockingdevicewhichcomesintooperationin
theeventofacollision,emergencybraking
orifthevehiclerollsover.Youcanrelease
thedevicebypullingthestrapfirmlyand
thenreleasingitsothatitreelsinslightly.
Recommendations for children
Useasuitablechildseatifthepassengeris
lessthan12yearsoldorshorterthanone
andahalfmetres.
Neverusethesameseatbelttosecuremore
thanoneperson.
Neverallowachildtotravelonyourlap.
Formoreinformation,refertothe"Child
seats"section.
Inordertobeeffective,aseatbeltmust:
- betightenedasclosetothebodyas
possible,
- bepulledinfrontofyouwithasmooth
movement,checkingthatitdoesnot
twist,
- beusedtorestrainonlyoneperson,
- notbearanytraceofcutsorfraying,
- notbeconvertedormodifiedtoavoid
affectingitsperformance.
In the event of an impact
Depending on the nature and
seriousness of the impact, the
pretensioningdevicemaybedeployed
beforeandindependentlyoftheairbags.
Deploymentofthepretensionersis
accompaniedbyaslightdischargeof
harmlesssmokeandanoise,duetothe
activationofthepyrotechniccartridge
incorporatedinthesystem.
Inallcases,theairbagwarninglampcomeson.
Followinganimpact,havetheseatbelts
systemchecked,andifnecessaryreplaced,
byaCITROËNdealeroraqualified
workshop.
Inaccordancewithcurrentsafety
regulations,forallrepairsonyourvehicle's
seatbelts,gotoaqualifiedworkshopwith
theskillsandequipmentneeded,whicha
CITROËNdealerisabletoprovide.
Haveyourseatbeltscheckedregularlyby
aCITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshop,
particularlyifthestrapsshowsignsof
damage.
Clean the seat belt straps with soapy
wateroratextilecleaningproduct,soldby
CITROËNdealers.
Afterfoldingormovingaseatorrearbench
seat,ensurethattheseatbeltispositioned
andreeledincorrectly.
135
7
Safety
Airbags
Systemdesignedtocontributetowards
improvingthesafetyoftheoccupants
(withtheexceptionoftherearcentre
passenger)intheeventofviolentcollisions.
Theairbagssupplementtheactionoftheforce-
limitingseatbelts(withtheexceptionofthe
centrerearpassenger).
Ifacollisionoccurs,theelectronicdetectors
recordandanalysethefrontandsideimpacts
sustainedintheimpactdetectionzones:
- inthecaseofaseriousimpact,theairbags
aredeployedinstantlyandcontribute
towardsbetterprotectionoftheoccupants
ofthevehicle(withtheexceptionofthe
rearcentrepassenger);immediatelyafter
theimpact,theairbagsdeflaterapidlyso
thattheydonothindervisibilityortheexit
of the occupants,
- inthecaseofaminororrearimpactorin
certainroll-overconditions,theairbags
maynotbedeployed;theseatbelt
alonecontributestowardsensuringyour
protectioninthesesituations.
The airbags do not operate when the
ignition is switched off.
Thisequipmentwillonlydeployonce.
Ifasecondimpactoccurs(duringthe
sameorasubsequentaccident),the
airbagwillnotbedeployedagain.
Deploymentofoneormoreofthe
airbagsisaccompaniedbyaslight
emissionofsmokeandanoise,due
to the activation of the pyrotechnic
cartridgeincorporatedinthesystem.
Thissmokeisnotharmful,butsensitive
individualsmayexperienceslight
irritation.
Thenoiseofdetonationrelatedtothe
deploymentofoneormoreairbagsmay
resultinaslightlossofhearingfora
shorttime.
Impact detection zones
A. Frontimpactzone.
B. Sideimpactzone.
136
Safety
Deactivating the passenger's
front airbag
Onlythepassenger'sfrontairbagcanbe
deactivated.
F With the ignition off,insertthekeyinthe
passengerairbagdeactivationswitch.
F Turn it to the "OFF"position.
F Removethekeykeepingtheswitchinthe
newposition.
Whentheignitionison,thiswarning
lampcomesintheseatbeltwarning
lampsdisplayscreen.Itstayson
whiletheairbagisdeactivated.
Toassurethesafetyofyourchild,
thepassenger'sfrontairbagmustbe
deactivatedwhenyouinstallarearward
facingchildseatonthefrontpassenger
seat.
Otherwise,thechildwouldriskbeing
seriouslyinjuredorkillediftheairbag
weredeployed.
Reactivating the passenger's
front airbag
Whenyouremovearearward facingchild
seat, with the ignition off, turn the switch to
the "ON"positiontoreactivatetheairbagand
soassurethesafetyofyourfrontpassengerin
theeventofanimpact.
Front airbags
Deployment
Theairbagsaredeployed,exceptthepassenger's
frontairbagifitisdeactivated,intheeventofa
seriousfrontimpacttoallorpartofthefrontimpact
zone A,inthelongitudinalcentrelineofthevehicle
onahorizontalplaneanddirectedfromthefrontto
therearofthevehicle.
Thefrontairbaginflatesbetweenthethorax
andheadofthefrontoccupantofthevehicle
andthesteeringwheel,driver'sside,andthe
dashboard,passenger'ssidetocushiontheir
forwardmovement.
Systemwhichprotectsthedriverandfront
passengerintheeventofaseriousfrontimpact
inordertolimittheriskofinjurytotheheadand
thorax.
Thedriver'sairbagisfittedinthecentreofthe
steeringwheel;thefrontpassenger'sairbag
isfittedintherooftoallowmorespaceinthe
glovebox.
Whentheignitionisswitchedon,this
warninglampcomesonintheseat
beltwarninglampsdisplayscreenfor
approximatelyoneminutetosignal
thatthefrontairbagisactivated.
137
7
Safety
Ifthiswarninglampflashes,contact
aCITROËNdealeroraqualified
workshop.Thepassenger'sfront
airbagmaynolongerbedeployedin
theeventofaseriousimpact.
Operating fault
Ifthiswarninglampcomesoninthe
instrumentpanel,accompaniedby
anaudiblewarningandamessage,
contactaCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshopwithoutdelay
tohavethesystemchecked.The
airbagsmaynolongerbedeployedin
theeventofaseriousimpact.
Intheeventofafault,identifiedbyat
leastoneofthetwoairbagwarning
lamps,donotinstallachildseatorseat
anadultonthefrontpassengerseat.
HaveitcheckedbyaCITROËNdealer
orqualifiedworkshop.
138
Safety
Lateral airbags
Deployment
Alateralairbagisdeployedunilaterallyinthe
eventofaserioussideimpactappliedtoallor
partofthesideimpactzoneB,perpendicular
tothelongitudinalcentrelineofthevehicleona
horizontalplaneanddirectedfromtheoutside
towardstheinsideofthevehicle.
Thelateralairbaginflatesbetweenthehipand
shoulderofthefrontoccupantofthevehicle
andthecorrespondingdoortrimpanel.
Systemwhichprotectsthedriverandfront
passengerintheeventofaserioussideimpact
inordertolimittheriskofinjurytothechest,
betweenthehipandtheshoulder.
Eachlateralairbagisfittedintheseatbackrest
frame,doorside.
Impact detection zones
A. Frontimpactzone.
B. Sideimpactzone.
139
7
Safety
Intheeventofaminorimpactorbump
onthesideofthevehicleorifthe
vehiclerollsover,theairbagsmaynot
bedeployed.
In the event of a rear or front collision,
noneofthelateralairbagsisdeployed.
Systemcontributingtowardsgreaterprotection
forthethedriverandpassengers(withthe
exceptionoftherearcentrepassenger)inthe
eventofaserioussideimpactinordertolimit
theriskofinjurytothesideofthehead.
Eachcurtainairbagisbuiltintothepillarsand
theupperpassengercompartmentarea.
Curtain airbags
Deployment
Thecurtainairbagisdeployedatthesame
timeasthecorrespondinglateralairbaginthe
eventofaserioussideimpactappliedtoallor
partofthesideimpactzoneB,perpendicular
tothelongitudinalcentrelineofthevehicleona
horizontalplaneanddirectedfromtheoutside
towardstheinsideofthevehicle.
Thecurtainairbaginflatesbetweenthefrontor
rearoccupantofthevehicleandthewindows.
Ifthiswarninglampcomesoninthe
instrumentpanel,accompaniedbyan
audiblesignalandamessage,contact
aCITROËNdealeroraqualified
workshoptohavethesystemchecked.
Theairbagsmaynolongerbedeployed
intheeventofaseriousimpact.
Operating fault
140
Safety
Sitinanormaluprightposition.
Wearacorrectlyadjustedseatbelt.
Donotleaveanythingbetweenthe
occupantsandtheairbags(achild,pet,
object...).Thiscouldhampertheoperationof
theairbagsorinjuretheoccupants.
Afteranaccidentorifthevehiclehasbeen
stolenorbrokeninto,havetheairbag
systemschecked.
Allworkontheairbagsystemmustbe
carriedoutbyaCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshop.
Evenifalloftheprecautionsmentioned
areobserved,ariskofinjuryorofminor
burnstothehead,chestorarmswhenan
airbagisdeployedcannotberuledout.
Thebaginflatesalmostinstantly(within
afewmilliseconds)thendeflateswithin
thesametimedischargingthehotgasvia
openingsprovidedforthispurpose.
Front airbags
Donotdriveholdingthesteeringwheelbyits
spokesorrestingyourhandsonthecentre
partofthewheel.
Passengersmustnotplacetheirfeetonthe
dashboard.
Donotsmokeasdeploymentoftheairbags
cancauseburnsortheriskofinjuryfroma
cigaretteorpipe.
Neverremoveorpiercethesteeringwheelor
hititviolently.
Donotfitorattachanythingtothesteering
wheelordashboard,thiscouldcause
injurieswithdeploymentoftheairbags.
For the airbags to be fully effective, observe the following safety rules:
Lateral airbags
Useonlyapprovedcoversontheseats,
compatiblewiththedeploymentthelateral
airbags.Forinformationontherangeofseat
covers suitable for your vehicle, you can
contactaCITROËNdealer.
Refertothe"Accessories"section.
Donotfixorattachanythingtotheseat
backs(clothing...).Thiscouldcauseinjury
tothechestorarmsifthelateralairbagis
deployed.
Donotsitwiththeupperpartofthebodyany
nearertothedoorthannecessary.
Curtain airbags
Donotfixorattachanythingtotheroof.This
couldcauseinjurytotheheadifthecurtain
airbagisdeployed.
Iffittedonyourvehicle,donotremovethe
grabhandlesinstalledontheroof,theyplay
apartinsecuringthecurtainairbags.
141
8
Child safety
Generalpointsrelatingtochildseats
CITROËN recommendsthatchildren
shouldtravelontherear seats of your
vehicle:
- rearward facinguptotheageof3,
- forward facingovertheageof3.
AlthoughoneofCITROËNmaincriteriawhendesigningyourvehicle,thesafetyofyourchildren
alsodependsonyou.
Formaximumsafety,pleaseobservethe
followingrecommendations:
- inaccordancewithEuropeanregulations,
all children under the age of 12 or less
than one and a half metres tall must
travel in approved child seats suited to
their weight,onseatsfittedwithaseat
beltorISOFIXmountings*,
- statistically, the safest seats in your
vehicle for carrying children are the
rear seats,
- a child weighing less than 9 kg must
travel in the rearward facing position
both in the front and in the rear.
*Theregulationsoncarryingchildrenare
specifictoeachcountry.Refertothe
legislationinforceinyourcountry.
142
Child safety
Childseatattherear
Rearward facing
Whenarearwardfacingchildseatisinstalled
on a rear passenger seat,movethevehicle's
frontseatforwardsandstraightenthebackrest
sothattherearwardfacingchildseatdoesnot
touchthevehicle'sfrontseat.
Forward facing
Whenaforwardfacingchildseatisinstalled
on a rear passenger seat,movethevehicle's
frontseatforwardsandstraightenthebackrest
sothatthelegsofthechildintheforward
facingchildseatdonottouchthevehicle'sfront
seat.
Ensurethattheseatbeltiscorrectly
tensioned.
Forchildseatswithasupportleg,
ensurethatthisisinfirmcontactwith
thefloor.Ifnecessary,adjustthefront
seatofthevehicle.
Centre rear seat
Achildseatwithasupportlegmustneverbe
installedonthecentre rear passenger seat.
143
8
Child safety
Childseatinthefront*
Rearward facing Forward facing
Passenger seat adjusted to the intermediate
longitudinal position.
Ensurethattheseatbeltiscorrectly
tensioned.
Forchildseatswithasupportleg,
ensurethatthesupportlegisinstable
contactwiththefloor.Ifnecessary,
adjustthepassengerseat.
Whenarearwardfacingchildseatisinstalled
on the front passenger seat,adjusttheseatto
theintermediatelongitudinalposition,withthe
backreststraightened.
Thepassenger'sfrontairbagmustbe
deactivated.Otherwise,the child would
risk being seriously injured or killed if the
airbag were to inflate.
Whenaforwardfacingchildseatisinstalledon
the front passenger seat,adjustthevehicle's
seattotheintermediatelongitudinalposition
withseatbackreststraightenedandleavethe
passenger'sfrontairbagactivated.
*Refertothecurrentlegislationinyourcountry
beforeinstallingyourchildonthefrontseat.
144
Child safety
Passenger airbag OFF
Thewarninglabelpresentonbothsidesofthe
passenger'ssunvisorrepeatsthisadvice.In
linewithcurrentlegislation,thefollowingtables
containthiswarninginallofthelanguages
required.
Neverinstallarearwardfacingchild
restraintsystemonaseatprotectedby
anactivefrontairbag.Thiscouldcause
thedeathofthechildorseriousinjury.
Forinformationondeactivatingthe
passenger'sfrontairbag,refertothe
"Airbags"section.
Deactivatingthepassenger'sfrontairbag
Thislabelislocatedonthemiddledoorpillar,
passengerside.
145
8
AR
BG
НИКОГАНЕинсталирайтедетскостолченаседалкасАКТИВИРАНАпреднаВЪЗДУШНАВЪЗГЛАВНИЦА.Товаможедапричини
СМЪРТилиСЕРИОЗНОНАРАНЯВАНЕнадетето.
CS
NIKDYneumisťujtedětskézádržnézízeníorientovanésměremdozadunasedadlochráněnéAKTIVOVANÝMčelnímAIRBAGEM.Hrozí
nebezpečíSMRTIDÍTĚTEneboVÁŽNÉHOZRANĚNÍ.
DA
BrugALDRIGenbagudvendtbarnestolpåetsæde,dererbeskyttetafenAKTIVAIRBAG.BARNETrisikereratbliveALVORLIGT
KVÆSTETellerDRÆBT.
DE
MontierenSieaufeinemSitzmitAKTIVIERTEMFront-AirbagNIEMALSeinenKindersitzodereineBabyschaleentgegenderFahrtrichtung,
dasKindkönnteschwereodersogartödlicheVerletzungenerleiden.
EL
ΜηχρησιμοποιείτεΠΟΤΕπαιδικόκάθισμαμετηνπλάτητουπροςτοεμπρόςμέροςτουαυτοκινήτου,σεμιαθέσηπουπροστατεύεταιαπό
ΜΕΤΩΠΙΚΟαερόσακοπουείναιΕΝΕΡΓΟΣ.ΑυτόμπορείναέχεισανσυνέπειατοΘΑΝΑΤΟήτοΣΟΒΑΡΟΤΡΑΥΜΑΤΙΣΜΟτουΠΑΙΔΙΟΥ
EN
NEVERusearearwardfacingchildrestraintonaseatprotectedbyanACTIVEAIRBAGinfrontofit,DEATHorSERIOUSINJURYtothe
CHILD can occur
ES
NOINSTALARNUNCAunsistemaderetencnparaniñosdeespaldasalsentidodelamarchaenunasientoprotegidomedianteun
AIRBAGfrontalACTIVADO,yaquepodríacausarlesionesGRAVESoinclusolaMUERTEdelniño.
ET
ÄrgeMITTEKUNAGIpaigaldage"seljagasõidusuunas"lapseistetjuhikõrvalistmele,milleESITURVAPADIonAKTIVEERITUD.Turvapadja
avaneminevõiblastTÕSISELTvõiELUOHTLIKULTvigastada.
FI
ÄLÄKOSKAANasetalapsenturvaistuintaselkäajosuuntaanistuimelle,jonkaedessäsuojanaonkäyttöönaktivoituTURVATYYNY.Sen
laukeaminenvoiaiheuttaaLAPSENKUOLEMANtaiVAKAVANLOUKKAANTUMISEN.
FR
NEJAMAISinstallerdesystèmederetenuepourenfantsfaisantfaceversl’arrièresurunsiègeprotégéparunCOUSSINGONFLABLE
frontalACTIVÉ.
CelapeutprovoquerlaMORTdelENFANTouleBLESSERGRAVEMENT
HR
NIKADAnepostavljatidječjusjedaliculeđimausmjeruvožnjenasjedalozaštenoUKLJUČENIMprednjimZRNIMJASTUKOM.Tobi
moglouzrokovatiSMRTiliTKUOZLJEDUdjeteta.
HU
SOHAnehasználjonmenetinynakháttalbeszereltgyermeküléstAKTIVÁLT(BEKAPCSOLT)FRONTLÉGZKKALvédettüsen.Eza
gyermekHALÁLÁTvagySÚLYOSSÉRÜLÉSÉTokozhatja.
IT
NONinstallareMAIseggioliniperbambiniposizionatiinsensocontrarioaquellodimarciasuunsedileprotettodaunAIRBAGfrontale
ATTIVATO.CiòpotrebbeprovocarelaMORTEoFERITEGRAVIalbambino.
LT
NIEKADAnrenkitevaikoprilaikymopriemossuatgalatgręžtuvaikuantsėdys,kurisaugomaVEIKIAIOSpriekinėsORO
PAGALVĖS.IšsiskleidusoropagalveivaikasgalibūtiMIRTINAIarbaSUNKIAITRAUMUOTAS.
Child safety
146
LV
NEKADNEuzstādietuzaizmugurivērstubērnusēdeklītiprieējāpasažierasēdvietā,kurāirAKTIVIZĒTSprieējaisDROŠĪBASGAISA
SPILVENS.
TasvarizraitBĒRNANĀVIvairadītNOPIETNUSIEVAINOJUMUS.
MT
Qattm’ghandekthallitifel/tiflamarbutf’siggudahrulejnl-Airbagattiva,ghaliextista’tikkawzakorrimentserjujewankemewtlit-tifel/tifla
NL
PlaatsNOOITeenkinderzitjemetderuginderijrichtingopeenzitplaatswaarvandeAIRBAGisINGESCHAKELD.Bijhetafgaanvande
airbagkanhetKINDLEVENSGEVAARLIJKGEWONDRAKEN
NO
InstallerALDRIetbarnesetemedryggenmotkjøreretningenietsetesomerbeskyttetmedenfrontalAKTIVERTKOLLISJONSPUTE,
BARNETrisikereråbliDREPTellerHARDTSKADET.
PL
NIGDYnieinstalowaćfotelikadzieccegowpozycji"tyłemdokierunkujazdy"nasiedzeniuwyposażonymwCZOŁOWĄPODUSZKĘ
POWIETRZNĄwstanieAKTYWNYM.MożetodoprowadzićdoŚMIERCIDZIECKAlubspowodowaćuniegoPOWAŻNEOBRAŻENIA
CIAŁA.
PT
NUNCAinstaleumsistemadereteãoparacriaasdecostasparaaestradanumbancoprotegidoporumAIRBAGfrontalACTIVADO.
EstainstalaçãopoderáprovocarFERIMENTOSGRAVESouaMORTEdaCRIANÇA.
RO
NuinstalatiNICIODATAunsistemderetinerepentrucopii,dispuscuspateleindirectiademers,peunlocdinvehiculprotejatcuAIRBAG
frontalACTIVAT.AceastaarputeaprovocaMOARTEACOPILULUIsauRANIREAluiGRAVA.
RU
ВОВСЕХСЛУЧАЯХЗАПРЕЩАЕТСЯиспользоватьобращенноеназаддетскоеудерживающееустройствонасиденье,
защищенномФУНКЦИОНИРУЮЩЕЙПОДУШКОЙБЕЗОПАСНОСТИ,установленнойпередэтимсиденьем.
ЭтоможетпривестикГИБЕЛИРЕБЕНКАилиНАНЕСЕНИЮЕМУСЕРЬЕЗНЫХТЕЛЕСНЫХПОВРЕЖДЕНИЙ
SK
NIKDYneinštalujtedetskézádržnézariadenieorientovanésmeromdozadunasedadlochránenéAKTIVOVANÝMčelnýmAIRBAGOM.
MohlobydôjsťkSMRTEĽNÉMUaleboVÁŽNEMUPORANENIUDIEŤAŤA.
SL
NIKOLInenamčajteotroškegasedashrbtomvsmerivožnje,čejeVARNOSTNABLAZINApredsprednjimsopotnikovimsedežem
AKTIVIRANA.TananamestitevlahkopovzročiSMRTOTROKAaliHUDEPKODBE.
SR
NIKADAnekoristitedečjesedištekojeseokrećeunazadnasedtuztićenimAKTIVNIMVAZDNIMJASTUKOMisprednjega,jer
mogunastupitiSMRTiliOZBILJNAPOVREDADETETA.
SV
PassagerarkrockkuddenframMÅSTEvaraavaktiveradomenbakåtndbilbarnstolinstalleraspådennaplats.Annarsriskerarbarnetatt
DASellerSKADASALLVARLIGT.
TR
KESİNLKLEHAVAYASTIAKFolanönkoltayüzüarkayadönükbirçocukkoltuğuyerleştirmeyiniz.BuÇOCUĞUNÖLMESİNEveya
ÇOKAĞIRYARALANMASINAsebepolabilir.
Child safety
147
8
Child safety
ChildseatsrecommendedbyCITROËN
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg
L1
"MERBaby-SafePlus"
Installedintherearwardfacingposition.
Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg
L4
"KLIPPANOptima"
From22kg(approximately6years),theboosterisusedonitsown.
L5
"RÖMERKIDFIX"
Canbefittedtothevehicle'sISOFIXmountings.
Thechildisrestrainedbytheseatbelt.
CITROËNoffersarangeofrecommendedchildseatswhicharesecuredusingathree point seat
belt.
148
Child safety
Installationofchildseatssecuredusingtheseatbelt
InaccordancewithEuropeanregulations,thistableindicatestheoptionsforinstallingchildseatssecuredusingtheseatbeltanduniversally
approved(a)inrelationtotheweightofthechildandtheseatinthevehicle.
Seat
Weight of the child /indicativeage
Groups 0 (b) and 0+
Birth to 13 kg
Uptoabout1year
Group 1
From 9 to 18 kg
From1toabout3years
Group 2
From 15 to 25 kg
From3toabout6years
Group 3
From 22 to 36 kg
From6toabout10years
1
st
row
Frontpassengerseat(c)without
heightadjustment(d)
U U U U
2
nd
row
Outerrearseats(e) U U U U
Centrerearseat(e) U (f) U (f) U U
149
8
Child safety
(a) Universalchildseat:childseatwhichcan
beinstalledinallvehiclesusingtheseat
belt.
(b) Group0:frombirthto10kg.Infantcar
seatsand"carcots"cannotbeinstalled
onthefrontpassengerseat.
Wheninstalledinthe2
nd
row, they
maypreventtheuseofoneormore
seats.
(c) Consultthelegislationinforceinyour
countrybeforeinstallingyourchildon
thisseat.
Removeandstowtheheadrestraint
beforeinstallingachildseatona
passengerseat.Refittheheadrestraint
oncethechildseathasbeenremoved.
U: Seatsuitablefortheinstallationofachild
seatsecuredusingtheseatbeltand
universallyapprovedrearwardfacingand/
orforwardfacing.
(d) Whenarearwardfacingchildseatis
installedonthefrontpassengerseat,
thepassenger'sfrontairbagmustbe
deactivated.Otherwisethechildwouldrisk
beingseriouslyinjuredorkillediftheairbag
weredeployed.
Whenaforwardfacingchildseatis
installedonthefrontpassengerseat,leave
thepassenger'sfrontairbagactive.
(e) Toinstallachildseatonarearseat,
rearwardfacingorforwardfacing,move
thefrontseatforward,thenstraightenthe
backresttoallowenoughspaceforthe
childseatandthechild'slegs.
(f) Achildseatwithsupportlegmustneverbe
installedonthecentrerearseat.
150
Child safety
Yourvehiclehasbeenapprovedinaccordance
with the latest ISOFIX regulation.
Theseats,representedbelow,arefittedwith
regulationISOFIXmountings:
"ISOFIX"mountings
Therearethreeringsforeachseat:
- aringBbehindtheseatforfixingtheupper
strap,referredtoastheTOP TETHER.
TheTOPTETHERisusedtosecurethe
upperstrapofchildseatsthathaveone.This
arrangementlimitstheforwardtippingofthe
childseatintheeventofafrontimpact.
ThisISOFIXmountingsystemprovidesfast,
reliableandsafefittingofthechildseatinyour
vehicle.
Forinformationonthepossibilitiesfor
installingISOFIXchildseatsinyour
vehicle,refertothesummarytable.
Theincorrectinstallationofachildseat
inavehiclecompromisesthechild's
protectionintheeventofanaccident.
Followtheinstructionsforfitting
childseatscontainedintheseat
manufacturer'sinstallationguide.
WhenfittinganISOFIXchildseattotheleft
handrearseat,beforefittingtheseat,first
movethecentrerearseatbelttowardsthe
middleofthevehicle,soastoavoidtheseat
interferingwiththeoperationoftheseatbelt.
The ISOFIX child seatsarefittedwithtwo
latcheswhicharesecuredonthetworingsA.
Someseatsalsohaveanupper strap,known
astheTOPTETHER,whichisattachedto
ringB.
TosecurethechildseattotheTOPTETHER:
- removeandstowtheheadrestraintbefore
installingthechildseatinthisseating
position(refititoncethechildseathas
beenremoved),
- passthestrapofthechildseatoverthetop
oftheseatbackrest,centredbetweenthe
aperturesfortheheadrestraintrods,
- fixthehookoftheupperstraptotheringB,
- tightentheupperstrap.
- tworingsA,locatedbetweenthevehicle
seatbackandcushion,indicatedbya
marking,
151
8
Child safety
ISOFIXchildseatsrecommendedbyCITROËN
"RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus" and its ISOFIX base
(sizecategory:E)
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg
InstalledrearwardfacingusinganISOFIXbasewhichisattachedtotheringsA.
Thebasehasasupportleg,adjustableforheight,whichsitsonthevehicle'sfloor.
Thischildseatcanalsobesecuredwithaseatbelt.Inthiscase,onlytheshellisusedand
attachedtothevehicle'sseatbythethree-pointseatbelt.
"RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX"(sizecategory:B1)
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
Installedforwardfacing
AttachedtotheringsAandtheupperringB,referredtoastheTOPTETHER,
usinganupperstrap.
Threeseatbodyangles:sitting,reclining,lyingdown.
ThischildseatcanalsobeusedonseatsnotequippedwithISOFIXmountings.
Inthiscase,itmustbesecuredtotheseatusingthethree-pointseatbelt.
CITROËNoffersarangeofISOFIXchildseatslistedandtypeapprovedforyourvehicle.
Referalsotothechildseatmanufacturer'sfittinginstructionsforinformationoninstallingandremovingtheseat.
152
Child safety
LocationsforISOFIXchildseats
InaccordancewithEuropeanRegulations,thistableindicatestheoptionsforinstallingISOFIXchildseatsonseatsinthevehiclefittedwithISOFIX
mountings.
Inthecaseofuniversalandsemi-universalISOFIXchildseats,theISOFIXsizecategory,determinedbyaletterfromA to G,isindicatedonthechild
seatnexttotheISOFIXlogo.
IUF: seat suitable for the installation of an IsofixUniversal seat, Forward
facingsecuredusingtheupperstrap.
IL-SU: seat suitable for the installation of an IsofixSemi-Universalseateither:
- rearwardfacingfittedwithanupperstraporasupportleg,
- forwardfacingfittedwithasupportleg,
- aninfantcarseatfittedwithanupperstraporasupportleg.
Weight of the child/indicativeage
Less than 10 kg
(group 0)
Up to about
6months
Less than 10 kg
(group 0)
Less than 13 kg
(group 0+)
Uptoabout1year
From 9 to 18 kg (group 1)
Fromabout.1to3years
Type of ISOFIX child seat Infant car seat rearward facing rearward facing forward facing
ISOFIX size category F G C D E C D A B B1
1
st
row Frontpassengerseat Not ISOFIX
2
nd
row
Outer rear seats IL-SU IL-SU IL-SU IL-SU IL-SU
IUF
IL-SU
Centre rear seat Not ISOFIX
Removeandstowtheheadrestraintbeforeinstallingachildseatonapassengerseat.
Refittheheadrestraintoncethechildseathasbeenremoved.
Foradviceonsecuringtheupperstrap,refertothe"ISOFIXmountings"
section.
153
8
Child safety
Locationsfori-Sizechildseats
Thei-SizechildseatshavetwolatchesthatengageonthetworingsA.
Refertothe"ISOFIXmountings"section.
i-U: seatsuitablefori-Sizerestraintsofthe"universal"category,
forwardfacingorrearwardfacing.
Removeandstowtheheadrestraintbeforeinstallingachildseatonapassengerseat.
Refittheheadrestraintoncethechildseathasbeenremoved.
(a) toinstallachildseatattherear,rearwardfacingorforwardfacing,
movethefrontseatforward,thenstraightenthebackresttoallow
enoughspaceforthechildseatandthechild'slegs.
Thei-Sizechildseatsalsohave:
- eitheranupperstrapwhichisattachedtotheringB(seethe"ISOFIXmountings"section).
- orasupportlegwhichsitsonthevehicle'sfloor,compatiblewithseatapprovedfori-Size,theroleofwhichistopreventthechildseatfromtipping
forwardsintheeventofacollision.
InaccordancewiththenewEuropeanRegulations,thistableindicatestheoptionsforinstallingi-Sizechildseatsonseatsinthevehiclefittedwith
ISOFIXmountingsandapprovedfori-Size.
i-Size child seat
1
st
row Frontpassengerseat Noti-Size
2
nd
row
Outerrearseats(a) i-U
Centre rear seat Noti-Size
154
Child safety
Child seats
Recommendations
Installing a booster
cushion
Thechestpartoftheseatbeltmustbe
positionedonthechild'sshoulderwithout
touchingtheneck.
Ensurethatthelappartoftheseatbelt
passescorrectlyoverthechild'sthighs.
CITROËNrecommendstheuseofabooster
seatwhichhasaback,fittedwithaseatbelt
guideatshoulderlevel.
Asasafetyprecaution,donotleave:
- oneormorechildrenaloneand
unsupervisedinavehicle,
- achildorananimalinavehiclewhich
isexposedtothesun,withthewindows
closed,
- thekeyswithinreachofchildreninside
thevehicle.
Topreventaccidentalopeningofthedoors,
usethechildlock.
Takecarenottoopentherearwindowsby
morethanonethird.
Toprotectyoungchildrenfromtheraysof
thesun,fitsideblindsontherearwindows.
Children at the front
Foroptimuminstallationoftheforwardfacing
childseat,ensurethatthebackofthechild
seatisascloseaspossibletothebackrest
ofthevehicle'sseat,orincontactifpossible.
Theheadrestraintmustberemovedbefore
installingachildseatwithabackrestonthe
passengerseat.
Ensurethattheheadrestraintisstowedor
attachedsecurelysothatitisnotthrown
aroundthevehicleintheeventofsharp
braking.
Refittheheadrestraintassoonasthechild
seatisremoved.
Thelegislationoncarryingachildonthe
frontpassengerseatisspecifictoeach
country.Refertothelegislationinforcein
thecountryinwhichyouaredriving.
Deactivatethepassenger'sfrontairbag
whenarearwardfacingchildseatisinstalled
onthefrontpassengerseat.Otherwise,the
childwouldriskbeingseriouslyinjuredor
killediftheairbagweredeployed.
Theincorrectinstallationofachildseatina
vehiclecompromisesthechild'sprotectionin
theeventofanaccident.
Checkthatthereisnoseatbeltorseatbelt
buckleunderthechildseatasthiscould
destabiliseit.
Remembertofastentheseatbeltsorthe
childseatharnesseskeeping the slack in
relationtothechild'sbodyto a minimum,
evenforshortjourneys.
Fortheinstallationofachildseatusinga
seatbelt,ensurethatthisiswelltensioned
onthechildseatandthatitisholdingthe
childseatfirmlyagainsttheseatofyour
vehicle.Ifyourfrontpassengerseatis
adjustable,moveitforwardifnecessary.
At the rear seats, always leave sufficient
spacebetweenthefrontseatand:
- arearwardfacingchildseat,
- thefeetofachildseatedinaforward
facingchildseat.
Forthis,movethefrontseatforwardandif
necessarystraightenitsbackrest.
155
8
Child safety
Electricchildlock
Switching on
F Withtheignitionon,pressthisbutton.
Theindicatorlampinthebuttoncomeson,
accompaniedbyamessagetoconfirmthatthe
childlockison.
Thisindicatorlampremainsonuntilthechild
lockisswitchedoff.
Itisstillpossibletoopenthedoorsfromthe
outside.
Switching off
F Withtheignitionon,pressthisbutton
again.
Theindicatorlampinthebuttongoesoff,
accompaniedbyamessagetoconfirmthatthe
childlockisoff.
Thisindicatorlampremainsoffwhilethechild
lockisswitchedoff.
Remotecontrolsystemtopreventopeningofthereardoorsusingtheirinteriorcontrols.
Anyotherstatusoftheindicatorlamp
indicatesafaultwiththeelectricchild
lock.
HaveitcheckedbyaCITROËNdealer
oraqualifiedworkshop.
Thissystemisindependentandinno
circumstancesdoesittaketheplaceof
thecentrallockingcontrol.
Checkthestatusofthechildlockeach
timeyouswitchontheignition.
Alwaysremovethekeyfromtheignition
whenleavingthevehicle,evenfora
shorttime.
156
Practical information
Fueltank
Capacity of the tank:
- Petrol:approximately50litres.
- Diesel:approximately45or50litres(dependingonversion).
Low fuel level Refuelling
Whenthelowfuellevelisreached,
thiswarninglampintheinstrument
panelcomeson,accompaniedby
anaudiblewarning,amessageand
thelastbarofthefuelgaugeflashes
inred.
Torefuelincompletesafety:
F You must switch off the engine.
F Openthefillerflap.
Alabelontheinsideofthefuelfillerflap
remindsyouofthetypeoffueltouse,
dependingonyourenginetype.
Additionsoffuelmustbeofatleast5litresto
beregisteredbythefuelgauge.
Whenitfirstcomeson,about 5 litres of fuel
remaininthetank.
Untilsufficientfuelhasbeenadded,this
warninglampappearseverytimetheignition
isswitchedon,accompaniedbyanaudible
warningandamessage.Thisaudiblewarning
andmessagearerepeatedwithincreasing
frequencyasthefuelleveldropstowards"0".
Refuelassoonaspossibletoavoid
runningout.
Openingthefillercapmayresultinaninrushof
air.Thisisentirelynormalandresultsfromthe
sealingofthefuelsystem.
With Stop & Start, never refuel with the
systeminSTOPmode;youmustswitch
offtheignitionwiththekey.
Ifyourunoutoffuel(Diesel),refer
alsotothesection"Runningoutoffuel
(Diesel)".
F Takecaretoselectthepumpthatdelivers
thecorrecttypeoffuelforyourvehicle.
F Introducethekeyintothecapandturnitto
theleft.
157
9
Practical information
F Removethecapandplaceitonthe
supportontheinnerfaceoftheflap.
F Introducethefillernozzleandpushitinas
faraspossiblebeforestartingtorefuel(risk
ofblowback).
F Maintainthispositionthroughoutthe
refuellingoperation.
Onceyouhavefinishedrefuelling:
F Refitthefillercap.
F Turnthekeytotheright,thenremoveit
fromthecap.
F Pushthefuelflaptocloseit.
If you are filling your tank to the top, do
not persist after the 3rd cut-off; this could
cause malfunctions.
ThepetrolorDieselengineofyourvehicleis
fittedwithacatalyticconverter,adevicewhich
helpstoreducethelevelofharmfulemissions
intheexhaustgases.
For petrol engines, you must use unleaded
fuel.
Thefillerneckisnarrower,allowingonly
unleadedpetrolnozzlestobeintroduced.
Yourvehicleisequippedwithasafetydevice
which cuts off the fuel supply in the event of a
collision.
Fuel cut-off
If you have put in the wrong fuel
for your vehicle, you must have the
fuel tank drained and filled with
the correct fuel before starting
the engine.
158
Practical information
Misfuelprevention(Diesel)*
Operation
Whenapetrolfillernozzleisintroducedintothe
fuelfillerneckofyourDieselvehicle,itcomes
intocontactwiththeflap.Thesystemremains
closedandpreventsfilling.
Do not persist but introduce a Diesel type
filler nozzle.
*Dependingoncountryofsale.
MechanicaldevicewhichpreventsfillingthetankofaDieselvehiclewithpetrol.Itavoidstheriskof
enginedamagethatcanresultfromfillingwiththewrongfuel.
Itremainspossibletouseafuelcanto
fillthetank.
Inordertoensureagoodflowoffuel,
donotplacethenozzleofthefuelcan
indirectcontactwiththeflapofthe
misfuelpreventiondeviceandpour
slowly.
Travelling abroad
AsDieselfuelpumpnozzlesmay
bedifferentinothercountries,the
presenceofthemisfuelprevention
devicemaymakerefuellingimpossible.
Beforetravellingabroad,
werecommendthatyoucheckwiththe
CITROËNdealernetwork,whetheryour
vehicleissuitableforthefuelpumpsin
thecountryinwhichyouwanttotravel.
159
9
Practical information
Fuel used for petrol engines
ThepetrolenginesarecompatiblewithE10
typepetrolbiofuels(containing10%ethanol),
conformingtoEuropeanstandardsEN228
andEN15376.
E85typefuels(containingupto85%ethanol)
arereservedexclusivelyforvehiclesmarketed
fortheuseofthistypeoffuel(BioFlex
vehicles).Thequalityoftheethanolmust
complywithEuropeanstandardEN15293.
Fuel used for Diesel
engines
TheDieselenginesarecompatiblewith
biofuelswhichconformtocurrentandfuture
Europeanstandards(Dieselfuelwhich
complieswithstandardEN590mixedwith
abiofuelwhichcomplieswithstandard
EN14214)availableatthepumps(containing
upto7%FattyAcidMethylEster).
B30biofuelcanbeusedincertainDiesel
engines.However,thisuse,evenoccasional,
requiresstrictapplicationofthespecial
servicingconditions.ContactaCITROËN
dealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
Theuseofanyothertypeof(bio)fuel
(vegetableoranimaloils,pureordiluted,
domesticfuel...)isstrictlyprohibited(riskof
damagetotheengineandfuelsystem).
160
Practical information
Runningoutoffuel(Diesel)
OnvehiclesfittedwithHDiengines,thefuel
systemmustbeprimedifyourunoutoffuel.
e-HDi 92 engine
F Fillthefueltankwithatleastfivelitresof
diesel.
F Openthebonnet.
F Ifnecessary,unclipthestylingcoverfor
accesstotheprimingpump.
F Squeezeandreleasetheprimingpump
repeatedlyuntilresistanceisfelt(there
mayberesistanceatthefirstpress).
F Operatethestarteruntiltheenginestarts
(iftheenginedoesnotstartatthefirst
attempt,waitaround15secondsbefore
tryingagain).
F Iftheenginedoesnotstartafterafew
attempts,operatetheprimingpumpagain
thenstarttheengine.
F Clipthestylingcoverbackinplace.
F Closethebonnet.
Iftheenginedoesnotstartfirsttime,
don'tkeeptryingbutstarttheprocedure
againfromthebeginning.
BlueHDi 100 engine
F Fillthefueltankwithatleastfivelitresof
Diesel.
F Switchontheignition(withoutstartingthe
engine).
F Waitaround6secondsandswitchoffthe
ignition.
F Repeattheoperation10times.
F Operatethestartertoruntheengine.
161
9
Practical information
AdBlue
®
additiveandSCRsystem
forBlueHDiDieselengines
Toassurerespectfortheenvironmentand
conformitywiththenewEuro6emissions
standard,withoutadverselyaffectingthe
performanceorfuelconsumptionofDiesel
engines,CITROËNhastakenthedecisionto
equipitsvehicleswithaneffectivesystemthat
associatesSCR(SelectiveCatalyticReduction)
withaparticlefilter(FAP)forthetreatmentof
exhaustgases.
Presentation of the SCR system
UsinganadditivecalledAdBlue
®
containingurea,
acatalyticconverterturnsupto85%ofnitrous
oxides(NOx)intonitrogenandwater,whichare
harmlesstohealthandtheenvironment.
OncetheAdBlue
®
tankisempty,
asystemrequiredbyregulations
preventsstartingoftheengine.
If the SCR is faulty, the level of
emissionsfromyourvehiclewillno
longermeettheEuro6standard:you
vehiclebecomespolluting.
Intheeventofaconfirmedfault
withtheSCRsystem,youmustgo
toaCITROËNdealeroraqualified
workshopassoonaspossible:after
arunningdistanceof650miles
(1100km),asystemwillbetriggered
automaticallytopreventenginestarting.
TheAdBlue
®
additiveisheldinaspecial
tanklocatedunderthebootattherearof
thevehicle.Ithasacapacityof17litres:this
providesadrivingrangeofabout12500miles
(20000km),afterwhichanalertistriggered
warningyouwhenthereserveremainingis
enoughforjust1500miles(2400km).
Duringeachscheduledserviceofyourvehicle
byaCITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshop,
theAdBlue
®
additivetankisrefilledinorderto
allownormaloperationoftheSCRsystem.
Iftheestimatedmileagebetweentwoservices
isgreaterthan12500miles(20000km),we
recommendthatyougotoaCITROËNdealer
oraqualifiedworkshoptohavethenecessary
top-upcarriedout.
162
Practical information
Range indicators
Whenswitchingontheignition,anindicator
givesanestimateofthedistancethatcan
betravelledwithyourvehiclebeforeengine
startingisautomaticallyprevented,oncethe
vehiclestartsusingthereserveofAdBlue
®
or
afterafaultisdetectedwiththeSCRsystem.
Intheeventofsimultaneoussystemfaultand
lowAdBlue
®
level,theshortestrangeistheone
displayed.
Range greater than 1 500 miles (2 400 km)
Whentheignitionisswitchedon,no
informationonrangeisdisplayedautomatically
intheinstrumentpanel.
Theenginestartpreventionsystem
requiredbyregulationsisactivated
automaticallyoncetheAdBlue
®
tankis
empty.
In the event of the risk of non-starting related to a lack of AdBlue
®
163
9
Practical information
Remaining range between 350 and 1500 miles (600 and 2 400 km)
Remaining range between 0 and 350 miles (0 and 600 km)
Breakdown related to a lack of AdBlue
®
additive
Tobeabletostarttheengine,
werecommendthatyoucallon
aCITROËNdealeroraqualified
workshopforthetop-uprequired.If
youcarryoutthetop-upyourself,itis
essentialtoaddatleast3.8litresof
AdBlue
®
tothetank.
Refertothe"Topping-up"section.
Whenswitchingontheignition,the
UREAwarninglampcomeson,accompanied
byanaudiblesignalandthedisplayofa
message(e.g.:"Topupemissionsadditive:
Startingpreventedin900miles")indicating
theremainingrangeexpressedinmilesor
kilometres.
Whendriving,themessageisdisplayedevery
150miles(300km)untiltheadditivetankhas
beentopped-up.
GotoaCITROËNdealeroraqualified
workshoptohavetheAdBlue
®
tanktopped-up.
Youcanalsotop-upthetankyourself.
Refertothe"Topping-up"section.
Whenswitchingontheignition,theSERVICE
warninglampcomesonandtheUREA
warninglampflashes,accompaniedbyan
audiblesignalandthedisplayofamessage
(e.g."Topupemissionsadditive:Starting
preventedin350miles")indicatingthe
remainingrangeexpressedinmilesor
kilometres.
Whendriving,themessageisdisplayedevery
30secondsuntiltheadditivetankhasbeen
topped-up.
GotoaCITROËNdealeroraqualified
workshoptohavetheAdBlue
®
tanktopped-up.
Youcanalsotop-upthetankyourself.
Refertothe"Topping-up"section.
Otherwise you will not be able to restart your
engine.
Whenswitchingontheignition,theSERVICE
warninglampcomesonandtheUREAwarning
lampflashes,accompaniedbyanaudible
signalandthedisplayofthemessage"Topup
emissionsadditive:Startingprevented".
TheAdBlue
®
tankisempty:thesystemrequired
byregulationspreventsenginestarting.
164
Practical information
In the event of a fault with the the SCR emissions control system
In the event of the detection of a fault During an authorised driving phase (between
650 miles and 0 miles) (1 100 km and 0 km)
Asystemthatpreventsenginestarting
isactivatedautomaticallyfrom
650miles(1100km)afterconfirmation
ofafaultwiththeSCRemissions
controlsystem.Havethesystem
checkedbyaCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshopassoonaspossible.
Ifitisatemporaryfault,thealert
disappearsduringthenextjourney,
afterself-diagnosisoftheSCRsystem.
TheUREA,SERVICEanddiagnosticwarning
lampscomeson,accompaniedbyanaudible
signalandthedisplayofthemessage
"Emissionsfault".
Thealertistriggeredwhendrivingwhenthe
faultisdetectedforthefirsttime,thenwhen
switchingontheignitionforsubsequent
journeys,whilethefaultpersists.
IfafaultwiththeSCRsystemisconfirmed
(after30miles(50km)coveredwiththe
permanentdisplayofthemessagesignalling
afault),theSERVICEandenginediagnostic
warninglampscomeonandtheUREA
warninglampflashes,accompaniedbyan
audiblesignalandthedisplayofamessage
(e.g.:"Emissionsfault:Startingpreventedin
150miles")indicatingtheremainingrange
expressinmilesorkilometres.
Whiledriving,themessageisdisplayedevery
30secondswhilethefaultwiththeSCRsystem
persists.
Thealertisrepeatedwhenswitchingonthe
ignition.
YoushouldgotoaCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshopassoonaspossible.
Otherwise, you will not be able to restart
yourengine.
165
9
Practical information
Starting prevented
Tobeabletostarttheengine,youmustcallon
aCITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
Youhaveexceededtheauthorised
drivinglimit:thestartingprevention
systeminhibitsenginestarting.
Freezing of the AdBlue
®
additive
TheAdBlue
®
additivefreezesat
temperaturesbelowaround-11°C.
TheSCRsystemincludesaheater
fortheAdBlue
®
tank,allowingyouto
continuedrivinginverycoldconditions.
Everytimetheignitionisswitchedon,theSERVICE
andenginediagnosticwarninglampscomeonand
theUREAwarninglampflashes,accompaniedby
anaudiblesignalandthedisplayofthemessage
"Emissionsfault:Startingprevented".
166
Practical information
Topping-up the AdBlue
®
additive
Precautions in use
FillingtheAdBlue
®
tankisanoperation
includedineveryroutineserviceonyour
vehiclebyaCITROËNdealeroraqualified
workshop.
Nevertheless,giventhecapacityofthetank,
itmaybenecessarytotop-uptheadditive
betweenservices,moreparticularlyifanalert
(warninglampsandamessage)signalsthe
requirement.
YoucangottoaCITROËNdealeroraqualified
workshop.
Ifyouenvisagetopping-upyourself,please
readthefollowingwarningscarefully.
KeepAdBlue
®
out of the reach of
children,initsoriginalbottle.
NevertransferAdBlue
®
to another
container:itwouldlooseitspurity.
Neverdilutetheadditivewithwater.
NeverpourtheadditiveintotheDiesel
fueltank.
Nevertop-upfromanAdBlue
®
dispenserreservedforheavygoods
vehicles.
UseonlyAdBlue
®
additivethatmeets
theISO22241standard.
Thesupplyinanon-dripbottlesimplifies
toping-up.Youcanobtain1.89litre(halfa
USgallon)bottlesfromaCITRNdealerora
qualifiedworkshop.
TheAdBlue
®
additiveisanurea-based
solution.Thisliquidisnon-flammable,
colourlessandodourless(keptinacoolarea).
Intheeventofcontactwiththeskin,wash
theaffectedareawithsoapandwater.Inthe
eventofcontactwiththeeyes,wash(irrigate)
theeyeswithlargeamountsofwaterorwith
aneyewashsolutionforatleast15minutes.
Ifaburningsensationorirritationpersists,get
medicalattention.
Ifswallowed,immediatelywashoutthemouth
withcleanwaterandthendrinkplentyofwater.
Incertainconditions(highambient
temperature,forexample),theriskofrelease
ofammoniacannotbeexcluded:donotinhale
theproduct.Ammoniavapourhasenirritant
effectonmucousmembranes(eyes,noseand
throat).
167
9
Practical information
Recommendations on storage
NeverstorebottlesofAdBlue
®
in your
vehicle.
Procedure
F Switchofftheignitionandremovethekey.
F ForaccesstotheAdBlue
®
tank,raisethe
bootcarpetthen,dependingonequipment,
liftoutthesparewheeland/orthestorage
box.
F Withoutpressing,turntheblackcapa
quarterturnanti-clockwiseandliftitoff.
AdBlue
®
freezesatabout-11°Cand
deterioratesabove25°C.Itisrecommended
thatbottlesbestoredinacoolareaand
protectedfromdirectsunlight.
Undertheseconditions,theadditivecanbe
keptforatleastayear.
Iftheadditivehasfrozen,canbeusedonceit
hascompletelythawedout.
Beforetopping-up,ensurethatthevehicleis
parkedonaflatandlevelsurface.
Inwintryconditions,ensurethatthe
temperatureofthevehicleisabove-11°C.
Otherwise,byfreezing,theAdBlue
®
cannot
bepouredintoitstank.Parkyourvehicleina
warmerareaforafewhourstoallowthetop-up
tobecarriedout.
F Turnthebluecapa6
th
ofaturnanti-
clockwise.
F Liftoffthecap.
168
Practical information
F ObtainabottleofAdBlue
®
.Afterfirst
checkingtheuse-bydate,readcarefully
the instructions on use on the label before
pouringthecontentsofthebottleintoyour
vehicle'sAdBlue
®
tank.
Important:ifyourvehicle'sAdBlue
®
tankiscompletelyempty-whichis
confirmedbythealertmessages
andtheimpossibilityofstartingthe
engine,youmustaddatleast3.8litres
(sotwo1.89litrebottles).
Ifanyadditiveissplitorsplashed,wash
immediatelywithcoldwaterorwipewith
adampcloth.
Iftheadditivehascrystallised,cleanit
offusingaspongeandhotwater.
Important:in the event of a top-up after
a breakdown because of a lack of
additive,signalledbythemessage"Top
upemissionsadditive:Startingprevented",
youmustwaitaround5minutesbefore
switchingontheignition,without opening
the driver's door, locking the vehicle
or introducing the key into the ignition
switch.
Switchontheignition,then,after
10seconds,starttheengine.
NeverdisposeofAdBlue
®
additive
bottlesinthehouseholdwaste.Place
theminaspecialcontainerprovided
thispurposeortakethemtoyourdealer.
F Afteremptyingthebottle,wipeawayany
spillagearoundthetankfillerusingadamp
cloth.
F Refitthebluecaptothetankandturn
ita6
th
ofaturnclockwise,toitsstop.
F Refittheblackcapandturnitaquarterof
aturnclockwisewithoutpressing.Ensure
thattheindicatoronthecaplinesupwith
theindicatoronthesupport.
F Dependingonequipment,returnthespare
wheeland/orthestorageboxtothebottom
oftheboot.
F Refitthebootcarpetandclosethetailgate.
169
9
Practical information
Thiskitisinstalledinthestoragebox,underthe
bootfloor.
Completesystemconsistingofacompressor
andasealantcartridgewhichpermits
temporary repair of a tyre so that you can
drivetothenearestgarage.
Itisdesignedtorepairmostpunctureswhich
couldaffectthetyre,locatedonthetyretread
orshoulder.
Temporarypuncturerepairkit
Access to the kit
List of tools
Thesetoolsarespecifictoyourvehicleandcan
varyaccordingtoequipment.Donotusethem
forotherpurposes.
1. 12Vcompressor.
Containsasealantcartridgeforthe
temporaryrepairofatyreandcanalsobe
usedforadjustingtyrepressures.
2. Towingeye.
Seethe"Towing"section.
170
Practical information
A. "Sealant"or"Air"positionselector.
B. On "I"/off"O"switch.
C. Deflationbutton.
D. Pressuregauge(inbarandp.s.i.).
E. Compartmenthousing:
- acablewithadaptorfor12Vsocket,
- variousinflationadaptorsfor
accessories, such as balls, bicycle
tyres...
Description of the kit
ThespeedlimitstickerImustbeaffixed
tothevehicle'ssteeringwheeltoremind
youthatawheelisintemporaryuse.
Donotexceedaspeedof50mph
(80km/h)whendrivingwithatyre
repairedusingthistypeofkit.
F. Sealantcartridge.
G. Whitepipewithcapforrepair.
H. Blackpipeforinflation.
I. Speedlimitsticker.
Thetyreinflationpressuresaregivenonthis
label.
171
9
Practical information
1. Sealing
Repair procedure
Avoidremovinganyforeignbodies
whichhavepenetratedintothetyre.
F Uncoil the white pipe Gfully.
F Unscrewthecapfromthewhitepipe.
F Connect the white pipe to the valve of the
tyretoberepaired.
F Switchofftheignition.
F Turn the selector A to the
"sealant"position.
F CheckthattheswitchB is in
position "O".
F Connectthecompressor'selectricplugto
thevehicle's12Vsocket.
F Startthevehicleandleavetheengine
running.
Takecare,thisproductisharmful(e.g.
ethylene-glycol,colophony...)ifswallowed
andcausesirritationtotheeyes.
Keepthisproductoutofthereachof
children.
Donotstartthecompressorbefore
connectingthewhitepipetothetyre
valve:thesealantproductwouldbe
expelledthroughthepipe.
172
Practical information
F Switchonthecompressorbymoving
the switch B to position "I" until the tyre
pressurereaches2.0bars.
Thesealantisinjectedintothetyreunder
pressure;donotdisconnectthepipefrom
thevalveduringthisoperation(riskof
splashing).
Ifafteraround5to7minutesthe
pressureisnotattained,thisindicates
thatthetyreisnotrepairable;contact
aCITROËNdealeroraqualified
workshopforassistance.
F Removethekitandscrewthecapbackon
thewhitepipe.
Takecaretoavoidstainingyourvehicle
withtracesoffluid.Keepthekittohand.
F Driveimmediatelyforapproximately
threemiles(fivekilometres),atreduced
speed(between15and35mph(20and
60km/h)),toplugthepuncture.
F Stoptochecktherepairandthetyre
pressureusingthekit.
Tyre under-ination
detection
Afterrepairofthetyre,thewarning
lampwillremainonuntilthesystemis
reinitialised.
Formoreinformation,refertothe
"Under-inflationdetection"section.
173
9
Practical information
2. Ination
F Turn the selector A to the "air"
position.
F UncoiltheblackpipeHfully.
F Connecttheblackpipetothe
valveofthewheel.
F Connectthecompressor'selectricplugto
thevehicle's12Vsocket.
F Startthevehicleagainandleavethe
enginerunning.
Assoonaspossible,gotoaCITROËN
dealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
Youmustinformthetechnicianthatyou
haveusedthiskit.Afterinspection,the
technicianwilladviseyouonwhether
thetyrecanberepairedorifitmustbe
replaced.
F Adjustthepressureusingthecompressor
(toinflate:switchB in position "I";
todeflate:switchB in position "O"and
press button C),inaccordancewiththe
vehicle'styrepressurelabel(locatedonthe
lefthanddooraperture).
Alossofpressureindicatesthatthe
puncturehasnotbeenfullyplugged;
contactaCITROËNdealerorqualified
workshopforassistance.
F Removeandstowthekit.
F Driveatreducedspeed(50mph[80km/h]
max)limitingthedistancetravelledto
approximately120miles(200km).
174
Practical information
Removing the cartridge
F Stowtheblackpipe.
F Detachtheangledbasefromthewhite
pipe.
F Supportthecompressorvertically.
F Unscrewthecartridgefromthebottom.
Bewareofdischargesoffluid.
Theexpirydateofthefluidisindicated
onthecartridge.
Thesealantcartridgeisdesignedfor
singleuse;evenifonlypartlyused,it
mustbereplaced.
Afteruse,donotdiscardthecartridge
intotheenvironment,takeittoan
authorisedwastedisposalsiteora
CITROËNdealer.
Donotforgettoobtainanewsealant
cartridge,availablefromCITROËN
dealersorfromaqualifiedworkshop.
175
9
Practical information
Checking tyre pressures /
inflating accessories
Youcanalsousethecompressor,without
injectinganyproduct,to:
- checkoradjustthepressureofyourtyres,
- inflateotheraccessories(balls,bicycle
tyres...).
F Turn the selector A to the "Air"
position.
F UncoiltheblackpipeHfully.
F Connectthecompressor'selectrical
connectortothevehicle's12Vsocket.
F Startthevehicleandlettheenginerun.
F Adjustthepressureusingthecompressor
(toinflate:switchB in position "I";
todeflate:switchB in position "O"and
press button C),accordingtothevehicle's
tyrepressurelabelortheaccessory's
pressurelabel.
F Removethekitthenstowit.
Shouldthepressureofoneormore
tyresbeadjusted,itisnecessaryto
reinitialisetheunder-inflationdetection
system.
Refertothe"Under-inflationdetection"
section.
F Connecttheblackpipetothevalveofthe
wheeloraccessory.
Ifnecessary,fitoneoftheadaptors
suppliedwiththekitfirst.
176
Practical information
Changingawheel
Thetoolsareinstalledinthebootunderthe
floor,ormaybelocated,dependingonversion,
underthefrontpassengerseat.
Access to the tools
List of tools
All of these tools are specific to your
vehicleandcanvaryaccordingtothelevel
ofequipment.Donotusethemforother
purposes.
1. Wheelbrace.
Forremovingthewheeltrimandthewheel
bolts.
2. Jackwithintegralhandle.
Forraisingthevehicle.
3. Boltcoverremovaltool.
Forremovingtheboltcoversonalloy
wheelsorthecentralwheelcap(depending
onversion).
4. Removabletowingeye.
Refertothe"Towing"section.
Procedureforchangingawheelforthesparewheelusingthetoolsprovidedwiththevehicle.
Wheel with trim
When refitting the wheel,refitthetrim
startingbyplacingitsnotchfacingthevalve
andpressarounditsedgewiththepalmof
yourhand.
177
9
Practical information
F Unclipthetoolstorageboxbypullingonit.
Thesparewheelisinstalledinthebootunder
thefloor.
Spare wheel (depending on version)
Taking out the wheel
F Unscrewtheyellowcentralbolt.
F Raisethesparewheeltowardsyoufrom
therear.
F Takethewheeloutoftheboot.
Putting the wheel back in place
F Putthewheelbackinitshousing.
F Unscrew the yellow central bolt by a few
turns then put it in place in the centre of the
wheel.
F Tightenfullyuntilthecentralboltclicksto
retainthewheelcorrectly.
F Clipthetoolstorageboxbackintoplace.
178
Practical information
Removing a wheel
Parking the vehicle
Immobilisethevehiclewhereitdoesnot
blocktraffic:thegroundmustbelevel,
stableandnotslippery.
Applytheparkingbrake,switchoffthe
ignitionandengagefirstgeartoblock
thewheels.
Checkthattheparkingbrakewarning
lampsintheinstrumentpanelcomeon.
Theoccupantsmustgetoutofthe
vehicleandwaitwheretheyaresafe.
Ensurethatthejackiscorrectly
positionedatoneofthevehicle's
jackingpoints.
Incorrectuseofthejackcouldcause
thevehicletodrop.
Nevergounderneathavehicleraised
usingajack;useanaxlestand.
List of operations
F Removetheboltcover(s)usingthetool3
(dependingonversion).
F Slackentheboltsusingthewheelbrace1
only.
Donotuse:
- thejackforanyotherpurposethan
liftingthevehicle,
- ajackotherthantheonesupplied
bythemanufacturer.
179
9
Practical information
F Positionthefootofthejack2ontheground
andensurethatitisdirectlybelowthe
front A or rear Bjackingpointprovidedon
theunderbody,whicheverisclosesttothe
wheeltobechanged.
F Extendthejack2untilitsheadcomesintocontactwiththejackingpointA or Bused;
thevehicle'scontactareaA or Bmustengagewiththecentralpartoftheheadofthejack.
F Raisethevehicleuntilthereissufficientspacebetweenthewheelandthegroundtoadmitthe
spare(notpunctured)wheeleasily.
Ensurethatthejackisstable.Ifthegroundisslipperyorloose,thejackmayslipordrop-
Riskofinjury!
EnsurethatthejackispositionedonlyatoneofthejackingpointsA or Bunderthevehicle,
makingsurethatthevehicle'scontactsurfaceiscentredontheheadofthejack.Otherwise
thereisariskofdamagetothevehicleand/orofthejackdropping-Riskofinjury!
180
Practical information
Fitting a wheel
Fitting the spare wheel
Ifyourvehicleisfittedwithalloywheels,
whentighteningtheboltsonfitting,itis
normaltonoticethatthewashersdonot
comeintocontactwiththesparewheel.
Thewheelissecuredbytheconical
surfaceofeachbolt.
After changing a wheel
Havethetighteningoftheboltsandthe
pressureofthesparewheelchecked
byaCITROËNdealeroraqualified
workshopwithoutdelay.
Havethepuncturedwheelrepaired
andrefittedtothevehicleassoonas
possible.
F Removetheboltsandstoretheminaclean
place.
F Removethewheel.
181
9
Practical information
List of operations
F Putthewheelinplaceonthehub.
F Screwintheboltsfullybyhand.
F Pre-tightentheboltsusingthe
wheelbrace 1only.
F Lowerthevehiclefully.
F Foldthejack2anddetachit.
F Tightentheboltsusingthewheelbrace1
only.
F Refittheboltcover(s)(dependingon
version).
182
Practical information
Snow chains
Inwintryconditions,snowchainsimprovetractionaswellasthebehaviourofthevehiclewhen
braking.
Useonlythechainsdesignedtobefittedtothe
typeofwheelfittedtoyourvehicle:
Originaltyre
size
Maximum
linksize.
195/65R15
9mm
205/55R16
205/50R17
cannotbefittedwithchains
Formoreinformationonsnowchains,contacta
CITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
Advice on installation
F Ifyouhavetofitthechainsduringa
journey,stopthevehicleonaflatsurface
onthesideoftheroad.
F Applytheparkingbrakeandpositionany
wheelchockstopreventmovementofyour
vehicle.
F Fitthechainsfollowingtheinstructions
providedbythemanufacturer.
F Moveoffgentlyanddriveforafew
moments,withoutexceeding30mph
(50km/h).
F Stopyourvehicleandcheckthatthesnow
chainsarecorrectlytightened.
Takeaccountofthelegislationinforce
in your country on the use of snow
chainsandthemaximumrunningspeed
authorised.
Thesnowchainsmustbefittedonly
tothefrontwheels.Theymustnever
befittedto"space-saver"typespare
wheels.
Avoiddrivingwithsnowchainsonroads
thathavebeenclearedofsnow,to
avoiddamagingyourvehicle'styresand
theroadsurface.Ifyourvehicleisfitted
withalloywheels,checkthatnopartof
thechainoritsfixingsisincontactwith
thewheelrim.
Itisstronglyrecommendedthatbefore
youleave,youpractisefittingthesnow
chainsonalevelanddrysurface.
183
9
Practical information
Changingabulb
Front lamps
1. Daytime running lamps / Sidelamps
(LEDs).
2. Dipped beam headlamps (H7).
3. Main beam headlamps (H1).
4. Direction indicators (PY21W).
5. Front foglamps (PS24W).
Insomeweatherconditions(e.g.low
temperatureorhumidity),thepresence
ofmistingontheinternalsurfaceofthe
glassoftheheadlampsandrearlamps
isnormal;itdisappearsafterthelamps
havebeenonforafewminutes.
Theheadlampsarefittedwith
polycarbonateglasswithaprotective
coating:
F do not clean them using a dry
or abrasive cloth, nor with a
detergent or solvent product,
F useaspongeandsoapywaterora
pHneutralproduct,
F whenusingahighpressurewasher
onpersistentmarks,donotkeep
thelancedirectedtowardsthe
lampsortheiredgesfortoolong,
soasnottodamagetheirprotective
coatingandseals.
Changingabulbshouldonlybedone
aftertheheadlamphasbeenswitched
offforseveralminutes(riskofserious
burns).
F Donottouchthebulbdirectlywith
yourfingers,usealint-freecloth.
Itisimperativetouseonlyanti-
ultraviolet(UV)typebulbstoavoid
damagingtheheadlamp.
Alwaysreplaceafailedbulbwitha
newbulbwiththesametypeand
specification.
184
Practical information
Daytime running lamps /
Sidelamps (LEDs)
Forthereplacementofthelight-emitting
diodes(LEDs),contactaCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshop.
F Disconnectthebulbconnector.
F Removethebulbandchangeit.
Dipped beam headlamps
F Removetheprotectivecoverbypullingthe
tab.
F Taketheconnectorandbulbholder,then
lifttheassemblyupwardstounclipit.
F Removetheassemblyofconnectorand
bulbholder.
Toreassemble,carryouttheseoperationsin
reverseorder,positioning the alignment lug
at the top.
185
9
Practical information
Main beam headlamps
F Removetheprotectivecoverbypulling
thetab.
F Disconnectthebulbconnector(donot
removetheearthconnectorlocatedbelow).
F Pushonthespring,thenmoveittowards
themiddleofthevehicletoreleasethe
bulb.
F Removethebulbandchangeit.
Direction indicators
Ambercolouredbulbs,suchasthe
directionindicators,mustbereplaced
withbulbsofidenticalspecifications
andcolour.
Rapidflashingofthedirectionindicator
warninglamp(rightorleft)indicatesthe
failureofabulbonthatside.
F Turnthebulbholderaneighthofaturn
anti-clockwiseandextractit.
F Removethebulbandchangeit.
Toreassemble,carryouttheseoperationsin
reverseorder.
Toreassemble,carryouttheseoperationsin
reverseorder.
186
Practical information
Front foglamps
You can also contact a CITROËN
dealeroraqualifiedworkshopforthe
replacementofthesebulbs.
F Belowthefrontbumper,unscrewthe
3wheelarchlinerfixingscrews.
F Movethewheelarchlinerasidetoallow
accesstothefrontfoglamp.
F Disconnecttheconnectorfromthebulb
holderbypressingonitstab,located
atthetop.
F Removethebulbholderbysqueezing
thetwoclips(topandbottom)withthumb
andfinger.
F Replacethemodule(bulbholderandbulb).
Toreassemble,carryouttheseoperationsin
reverseorder.
187
9
Practical information
Direction indicator side
repeaters
F Insertascrewdriverintheedgeofthe
repeater.
F Leverwiththescrewdrivertoextractthe
repeaterandpullitout.
F Disconnectthewiringfromtherepeater.
F Replacethemodule.
Toobtainanewmodule,contactaCITROËN
dealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
To refit, carry out these operations in reverse
order.
Whileremovingthemodule:
- takecarenottodamageyour
vehicle'spaintworkwiththe
screwdriver,
- donotallowthewiringand
connectortoslipbehindthewing.
Ifyouexperienceanydifficultyin
replacingtheselamps,youcancontact
aCITROËNdealeroraqualified
workshop.
188
Practical information
1. Sidelamps (W5W).
2. Brake lamps (P21W).
3. Direction indicators (PY21W).
4. Foglamp or reversing lamp (P21W).
Rear lamps
Changing bulbs
Toreassemble,carryouttheseoperationsin
reverseorder.
F Spreadthebulbholderretainersand
removethebulbholder.
F Replacethefailedbulb:
- forthesidelamp,pullthebulb
(theupperone)out,
- fortheotherlamps,turnthe
correspondingbulb(lower)aquarterturn.
Thesebulbsarechangedfrominsidetheboot.
F Opentheboot.
F Removethecorrespondingaccesscoverin
thetrimpanel.
F Disconnectthelampunitconnectorby
pressingthelockingbutton(locatedunder
theconnectorfortherighthandlampand
above the connector for the left
handlamp),
F Slackenandremovethenut(take care not
to drop it inside the wing).
F Pressdownontheretainingclipforlamp
unit,thencarefullyremoveittowardsthe
outside.
Takecaretoengagethelampunitin
itsguides,whilekeepingitinlinewith
thevehicle.
Tightensufficientlytoensuresealing,
butwithoutdamagingthelamp.
189
9
Practical information
Third brake lamp (LEDs) Number plate lamps (W5W)
Torefit,pressonthelenstoclipitinplace.
F Insertathinscrewdriverintooneofthe
cutoutsinthethelens.
F Pushitoutwardstounclipit.
F Removethelens.
F Changethefaultybulb.
Forthereplacementofthelight-emitting
diodes(LEDs),contactaCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshop.
190
Practical information
F Usingasmallflatbladescrewdriver,unclip
theconsoleassemblysurroundingthe
courtesylamp.
F Removethefailedbulbandchangeit.
F Refittheconsolearoundthecourtesy
lamp,ensuringthatitisclippedincorrectly.
Courtesy lamp
with bulbs (W5W)
Courtesy lamp
with LEDs
Forthereplacementofthelight-emitting
diodes(LEDs),contactaCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshop.
Boot (W5W)
F Unclipthelampbypushingthebodyfrom
behind.
F Removethebulbandchange.
F Refitthelamp.
Interior lighting
191
9
Practical information
Beforechangingafuse:
F thecauseofthefailuremustbeidentified
andrectified,
F allelectricalconsumersmustbe
switchedoff,
F thevehiclemustbeimmobilisedwiththe
ignitionoff,
F identifythefailedfuseusingthetablesand
layoutdrawingsinthefollowingpages.
Changing a fuse
Good Failed
Thereplacementofafusenotshownin
thetablesbelowmaycauseaserious
malfunctionofyourvehicle.Contact
aCITROËNdealeroraqualified
workshop.
Tweezer
Changingafuse
Theextractiontweezerisfittedtothebackof
thecoverofthedashboardfuseboxes.
Access to the tools
Toreplaceafuse,youmust:
F usethespecialtweezertoextractthefuse
fromitshousingandchecktheconditionof
itsfilament.
F alwaysreplacethefailedfusewithafuse
ofthesamerating(samecolour);using
adifferentratingcouldcausefaults(risk
offire).
Ifthefusefailsagainsoonafterreplacement,
havethevehicle'selectricalsystemcheckedby
aCITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
F Unclipthecoverbypullingatthetopleft,
thenright.
F Disengagethecovercompletelyandturnit
over,
F Removethetweezerfromthebackof
thecover.
192
Practical information
CITROËN will not accept responsibility
forthecostincurredinrepairingyour
vehicleorforrectifyingmalfunctions
resultingfromtheinstallationof
accessoriesnotsuppliedandnot
recommendedbyCITROËNand
notinstalledinaccordancewithits
instructions, in particular when the
combinedconsumptionofallofthe
additionalequipmentconnected
exceeds10milliamperes.
Installing electrical
accessories
Yourvehicle'selectricalsystemis
designedtooperatewithstandardor
optionalequipment.
Beforeinstallingotherelectrical
equipmentoraccessoriesonyour
vehicle,contactaCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshop.
193
9
Practical information
Dashboard fuses
Thetwofuseboxesareplacedinthelower
dashboard,attheglovebox.
Fuse
Rating
(A)
Functions
F01 10 Brakepedal(switch2),Stop&Start.
F02 5
Headlampbeamheightadjuster,additionalheater(Diesel),
parkingsensors,diagnosticsocket,doormirrors(electric
adjustment).
F03 10
Dieseladditivepump,electricpowersteering,clutchpedal
(switch).
F04 5 Rainandsunshinesensor.
F06 10 Brakepedal(switch1),diagnosticsocket.
F08 5 Topofsteeringcolumncontactswithsteeringmountedcontrols.
F10 10 Emergencycall/Assistancecall.
F12 5 Stop&Start,ABS,ESC.
F13 5 Parkingsensors,reversingcamera.
F14 15
Electronicgearbox,switchpanel(belowthetouchscreen
tablet),airconditioning,touchscreentablet.
F16 15 12Voltsocket.
F18 20 Radio.
Access to the fuses
F Unclipthecoverbypullingattopleft,then
right.
Left hand fusebox
194
Practical information
Fuse
Rating
(A)
Functions
F19 5 Seatbeltunfastenedwarning.
F20 5 Airbags.
F21 5 Instrumentpanel.
F22 30 Locks.
F23 5 Courtesylamp.mapreadinglamp.
F26 15 Horn.
F27 15 Frontandrearscreenwash.
F28 5 Ignitionswitch.
F30 15 Rear wiper
195
9
Practical information
Right hand fuse box
Fuse
Rating
(A)
Functions
F30 10 Heatedmirrors.
F31 25 Heatedrearscreen.
F34 30 Frontelectricwindows.
F38 20 Trailerinterfaceunit.
F40 25 Trailerinterfaceunit.
196
Practical information
Engine compartment fuses
Access to the fuses
F Unclipthecover.
F Changethefuse(seecorresponding
paragraph).
F Whenyouhavefinished,closethecover
carefullytoensurecorrectsealingofthe
fusebox.
Fuse
Rating
(A)
Functions
F1 40 Airconditioning.
F2 30 / 40 Stop&Start.
F3 30 Passengercompartmentfusebox.
F4 70 Passengercompartmentfusebox.
F5 70 Built-inSystemsInterface(BSI).
F6 60 Coolingfanassembly.
F7 80 Built-inSystemsInterface(BSI).
F8 15 Enginemanagement,petrolpump.
F9 15 Enginemanagement.
F10 15 Enginemanagement.
F11 20 Enginemanagement.
F12 5 Coolingfanassembly.
F13 5 Built-inSystemsInterface(BSI).
F14 5 Batterychargeunit(nonStop&Startengine).
F15 5 Stop&Start.
F17 5 Built-inSystemsInterface(BSI).
F18 10 Righthandmainbeamheadlamp.
Thefuseboxisplacedintheengine
compartmentnearthebattery.
197
9
Practical information
Fuse
Rating
(A)
Functions
F19 10 Lefthandmainbeamheadlamp.
F20 30 Enginemanagement.
F21 30 Startermotor.
F22 40 Electronicgearbox.
F23 40 ABS,ESC.
F24 20 ABS,ESC.
F25 30 Passengercompartmentfusebox.
F26 15 Electronicgearbox.
F27 25 Built-inSystemsInterface(BSI).
F28 30 Dieselemissionscontrolsystem(AdBlue
®
).
F29 40 Windscreenwipers.
F30 80 Preheatercontrolunit.
F31 100 Additionalheater(Diesel).
F32 80 Electricpowersteering.
198
Practical information
12Vbattery
Thebatteryislocatedunderthebonnet.
Foraccesstothe(+)terminal:
F releasethebonnetusingtheinteriorlever,
thentheexteriorsafetycatch,
F raisethebonnetandsecureitwithitsstay,
F lift the plastic cover for access to
the(+)terminal.
Access to the battery
Procedureforstartingtheengineusinganotherbatteryorchargingadischargedbattery.
The presence of this label, in particular
withtheStop&Startsystem,indicates
theuseofa12Vlead-acidbatterywith
specialtechnologyandspecification;
theinvolvementofaCITROËNdealer
oraqualifiedworkshopisessential
whenreplacingordisconnecting
thebattery.
Afterrefittingthebattery,theStop&
Startsystemwillonlybeactiveaftera
continuousperiodofimmobilisationofthe
vehicle,aperiodwhichdependsonthe
climaticconditionsandthestateofcharge
ofthebattery(uptoabout8hours).
Before doing any work
Immobilisethevehicle:applythe
parkingbrake,putthegearboxin
neutral,thenswitchofftheignition.
Checkthatallelectricalequipmentis
switchedoff.
199
9
Practical information
Donotapplyexcessiveforceonthe
tabaslockingwillnotbepossibleifthe
clampisnotpositionedcorrectly;start
theprocedureagain.
Disconnecting the (+) cable
F RaisethelockingtabD fully to release the
cableterminalclampE.
Reconnecting the (+) cable
F PositiontheopenclampE of the cable on
thepositivepost(+)ofthebattery.
F PressverticallyontheclampE to position
itcorrectlyonthebattery.
F Locktheclampbyspreadingthe
positioninglugandthenloweringthetabD.
200
Practical information
Whenyourvehicle'sbatteryisdischarged,the
enginecanbestartedusingaslavebattery
(externaloronanothervehicle)andjumplead
cables.
Starting using another
battery
F Operatethestarteronthebrokendown
vehicleandlettheenginerun.
Iftheenginedoesnotstartstraightaway,
switchofftheignitionandwaitafew
momentsbeforetryingagain.
F Removetheplasticcoverfrom
the(+)terminal,ifyourvehiclehasone.
F Connecttheredcabletothepositive
terminal(+)oftheflatbatteryA, then to the
positiveterminal(+)oftheslavebatteryB.
F Connectoneendofthegreenorblack
cabletothenegativeterminal(-)ofthe
slave battery B(orearthpointontheother
vehicle).
F Connecttheotherendofthegreenorblack
cable to the earth point Conthebroken
downvehicle(orontheenginemounting).
F Starttheengineofthevehiclewiththe
goodbatteryandleaveitrunningfora
fewminutes.
Firstcheckthattheslavebatteryhasa
nominalvoltageof12Vandacapacity
atleastequaltothatofthedischarged
battery.
Donottrytostarttheengineby
connectingabatterycharger.
Donotdisconnectthe(+)terminalwhen
theengineisrunning.
Before disconnecting the battery
Wait2minutesafterswitchingofftheignition
beforedisconnectingthebattery.
Closethewindowsandthedoorsbefore
disconnectingthebattery.
Following reconnection of
the battery
Followingreconnectionofthebattery,switchon
theignitionandwait1minutebeforestartingto
permitinitialisationoftheelectronicsystems.
However,ifproblemsremainfollowingthis
operation,contactaCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshop.
Referringtothecorrespondingsection,you
mustyourselfreinitialise(dependingon
version):
- theremotecontrolkey,
- ...
F Waituntiltheenginereturnstoidlethen
disconnectthejumpleadcablesinthe
reverseorder.
F Refittheplasticcovertothe(+)terminal,if
yourvehiclehasone.
201
9
Practical information
Thebatteriescontainharmfulsubstances
suchassulphuricacidandlead.They
mustbedisposedofinaccordance
withregulationsandmustnot,inany
circumstances,bediscardedwithhousehold
waste.
Takeusedremotecontrolbatteriesand
vehiclebatteriestoaspecialcollectionpoint.
Protectyoureyesandfacebefore
handlingthebattery.
Alloperationsonthebatterymustbe
carriedoutinawellventilatedareaand
awayfromnakedflamesandsources
ofsparks,soastoavoidtheriskof
explosionorfire.
Donottrytochargeafrozenbattery;
thebatterymustfirstbethawedoutto
avoidtheriskofexplosion.Ifthebattery
hasbeenfrozen,beforecharginghave
itcheckedbyaCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshopwhowillcheckthat
theinternalcomponentshavenotbeen
damagedandthecasingisnotcracked,
whichcouldcausealeakoftoxicand
corrosiveacid.
Donotreversethepolarityanduseonly
a12Vcharger.
Donotdisconnecttheterminalswhile
theengineisrunning.
Donotchargethebatterieswithout
disconnectingtheterminalsfirst.
Washyourhandsafterwards.
Itisadvisabletodisconnectthebattery
ifthevehicleistobeleftunusedfor
morethanonemonth.
Ifyourvehicleisfittedwithanelectronic
gearbox,donotpushthevehicletostart
theengine.
Charging the battery using
a battery charger
F Disconnectthebatteryfromthevehicle.
F Followtheinstructionsforuseprovidedby
themanufacturerofthecharger.
F Connectthebatterystartingwiththe
negativeterminal(-).
F Checkthattheterminalsandconnectors
areclean.Iftheyarecoveredwithsulphate
(whitishorgreenishdeposit),removethem
andcleanthem.
WithStop&Start,thebatterydoesnot
havetobedisconnectedforcharging.
202
Practical information
Loadreductionmode
Systemwhichmanagestheuseofcertain
functionsaccordingtothelevelofcharge
remaininginthebattery.
Whenthevehicleisbeingdriven,theload
reductionfunctiontemporarilydeactivates
certainfunctions,suchastheairconditioning,
theheatedrearscreen...
Thedeactivatedfunctionsarereactivated
automaticallyassoonasconditionspermit.
Systemwhichmanagesthedurationofuseof
certain functions to conserve a sufficient level
ofchargeinthebattery.
Aftertheenginehasstopped,youcan
stillusefunctionssuchastheaudioand
telematicssystem,windscreenwipers,dipped
beamheadlamps,courtesylamps,etc.for
amaximumcombineddurationofabout
fortyminutes.
Energyeconomymode
Switching to economy mode
Amessagethenappearsintheinstrument
panelscreenindicatingthatthevehiclehas
switchedtoeconomymodeandtheactive
functionsareputonstandby.
Ifatelephonecallisbeingmadeatthistime,
itwillbemaintainedforaround10minutes
withtheBluetoothhands-freesystemofyour
audiosystem.
Exiting economy mode
Thesefunctionsarereactivatedautomatically
nexttimethevehicleisdriven.
Inordertorestoretheuseofthesefunctions
immediately,starttheengineandletitrun:
- forlessthantenminutes,tousethe
equipmentforapproximatelyfiveminutes,
- formorethantenminutes,tousethe
equipmentforuptoapproximately
thirtyminutes.
Lettheenginerunforthedurationspecifiedto
ensurethatthebatterychargeissufficient.
Donotrepeatedlyandcontinuouslyrestartthe
engineinordertochargethebattery.
Aflatbatterypreventstheenginefrom
starting(refertothe"Battery"section).
203
9
Practical information
Changingawiperblade
F Withinoneminuteafterswitchingoff
theignition,operatethewiperstalkto
positionthewiperbladesverticallyon
thewindscreen.
Removing
F Raisethecorrespondingwiperarm.
F Pullthescreenwashdeliverypipeto
disconnectitfromthejet(locatedonthe
wiperblade).
F Unclipthewiperbladeandremoveit.
Fitting
F Putthecorrespondingnewwiperbladein
placeandclipit.
F Connectthescreenwashdeliverypipeto
thejetonthewiperblade.
F Folddownthewiperarmcarefully.
After fitting a front wiper
blade
F Switchontheignition.
F Operatethewiperstalkagaintoparkthe
wiperblades.
Before removing a front
wiper blade
204
Practical information
Towing
General recommendations
Observethelegislationinforceinyourcountry.
Ensurethattheweightofthetowingvehicleishigherthanthatofthetowedvehicle.
Thedrivermustremainatthewheelofthetowedvehicleandmusthaveavaliddrivinglicence.
Whentowingavehiclewithallfourwheelsontheground,alwaysuseanapprovedtowingarm;
ropeandstrapsareprohibited.
Thetowingvehiclemustmoveoffgently.
Whentowingavehiclewiththeengineoff,thereisnolongeranypowerassistanceforbraking
orsteering.
Inthefollowingcases,youmustalwayscallonaprofessionalrecoveryservice:
- vehiclebrokendownonamotorwayorfastroad,
- four-wheeldrivevehicle,
- whenitisnotpossibletoputthegearboxintoneutral,unlockthesteering,orreleasethe
parkingbrake,
- towingwithonlytwowheelsontheground,
- wherethereisnoapprovedtowingarmavailable...
Procedureforhavingyourvehicletowedorfortowinganothervehicleusingaremovabletowingeye.
The towing eyeisstowedunderthebootfloor,
ormaybelocatedunderthefrontpassenger
seat,dependingonversion.
205
9
Practical information
Towing another vehicle
F Ontherearbumper,pressthebottomof
thecovertounclipit.
F Screwthetowingeyeinfully.
F Installatowingarm.
F Switchonthehazardwarninglampson
bothvehicles.
F Moveoffgentlyanddriveslowlyovera
shortdistanceonly.
F Onthefrontbumper,pressatthebottomof
thecovertounclipit.
F Screwthetowingeyeinfully.
F Installatowingarm.
F Putthegearleverintoneutral(controlN for
anelectronicgearbox).
Towing the vehicle
Failuretofollowthisinstructioncould
leadtodamagetocertaincomponents
(brakes,transmission,...)andthe
absenceofbrakingassistanceon
restartingtheengine.
F Unlockthesteeringbyturningtheignition
keyonenotchandreleasetheparking
brake.
F Switchonthehazardwarninglampson
bothvehicles.
F Moveoffgentlyanddriveslowlyovera
shortdistanceonly.
206
Practical information
Towingatrailer
Werecommendtheuseofgenuine
CITROËNtowbarsandtheirharnesses
thathavebeentestedandapproved
fromthedesignstageofyourvehicle,
andthatthefittingofthetowbaris
entrustedtoaCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshop.
Ifthetowbarisnotfittedbya
CITROËNdealer,itmuststillbe
fittedinaccordancewiththevehicle
manufacturer'sinstructions.
Yourvehicleisprimarilydesignedfor
transportingpeopleandluggage,butitmay
alsobeusedfortowingatrailer.
Drivingwithatrailerplacesgreater
demandsonthetowingvehicleandthe
drivermusttakeparticularcare.
207
9
Practical information
Driving advice
Distribution of loads
F Distributetheloadinthetrailersothat
theheaviestitemsareascloseas
possibletotheaxleandthenoseweight
approachesthemaximumpermitted
withoutexceedingit.
Airdensitydecreaseswithaltitude,thus
reducingengineperformance.Above
1000metres,themaximumtowedloadmust
bereducedby10%forevery1000metresof
altitude.
Side wind
F Takeintoaccounttheincreasedsensitivity
tosidewind.
Cooling
Towingatraileronaslopeincreasesthe
temperatureofthecoolant.
Asthefaniselectricallycontrolled,itscooling
capacityisnotdependentontheenginespeed.
F Tolowertheenginespeed,reduceyour
speed.
Themaximumtowedloadonalongincline
dependsonthegradientandtheambient
temperature.
Inallcases,keepacheckonthecoolant
temperature.
F Ifthewarninglampandthe
STOPwarninglampcomeon,
stopthevehicleandswitchoff
theengineassoonaspossible.
Braking
Towingatrailerincreasesthebrakingdistance.
Toavoidoverheatingofthebrakesonalong
mountaintypeofdescent,theuseofengine
brakingisrecommended.
Tyres
F Checkthetyrepressuresofthetowing
vehicleandofthetrailer,observingthe
recommendedpressures.
Lighting
F Checktheelectricallightingandsignalling
onthetrailer.
Refertothe"Technicaldata"sectionfordetails
oftheweightsandtowedloadswhichapplyto
yourvehicle.
Whennottowingatrailer,removethe
quickly-detachabletowballbefore
driving.
Therearparkingsensorswillbe
deactivatedautomaticallyifagenuine
CITROËNtowbarisused.
208
Practical information
Roof bars
Forsafetyreasonsandtoavoid
damagingtheroof,itisessentialtouse
transverseroofbarsthatareapproved
foryourvehicle.
Observethefittinginstructionsand
theconditionsofusegiveninthe
informationprovidedwiththeroofbars.
Version without longitudinal
bars
Toinstalltheroofbars,youmustsecure
themonlytothefouranchoragepointsinthe
roofframe.Thesepointsaremaskedbythe
vehicle'sdoorswhenclosed.
Theroofbarfixingsincludeastudthatshould
beintroducedintotheapertureateach
anchoragepoint.
Version with longitudinal
bars
Youmustfitthetransversebarstothe
longitudinalbarsatthefixingpointsindicated
byengravedmarkingsonthelongitudinalbars.
209
9
Practical information
Maximumload,distributedovertheroof
bars,foraloadingheightnotexceeding
40cm:80 kg.
Thisvalueissubjecttochange,please
checkthemaximumloadstatedinthe
instructionsprovidedwithheroofbars.
Iftheheightexceeds40cm,adaptthe
speedofthevehicletotheprofileofthe
roadtoavoiddamagingtheroofbars
andthefixingsonthevehicle.
Pleaserefertonationallegislationsoas
tomeettherequirementsoncarrying
objectsthatarelongerthanthevehicle.
Recommendations
F Distributetheloadevenly,avoiding
overloadingononeside.
F Arrangetheheaviestpartoftheloadas
closeaspossibletotheroof.
F Anchortheloadsecurelyandfitawarning
flagifpartofitoverhangsthevehicle.
F Drivegently,asthevehiclewillbemore
liabletotheeffectsofsidewinds(vehicle
stabilitymaybeaffected).
F Removetheroofbarsassoonastheyare
nolongerneeded.
210
Practical information
Verycoldclimatescreens
Removableprotectivescreenswhichpreventstheaccumulationofsnowattheradiatorcoolingfan.
F Offerupthecorrespondingscreentothe
frontbumperuppergrille.
F Pressontheedgetoengageitsfixingclips
inturn.
Proceedinthesamewayforthescreenonthe
lowergrille.
F Usingascrewdriver,leverinturnonthe
fixingsofeachscreentounclipthem.
Donotforgettoremovetheverycold
climatescreenswhen:
- theambienttemperatureexceeds
10°C,
- towing,
- atspeedsabove75mph(120km/h).
RemovalFitting
Beforefittingorremovingascreen,
ensurethattheengineisoffandthe
coolingfanhasstopped.
Itisrecommendedthatthescreens
befittedandremovedbyaCITROËN
dealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
211
9
Practical information
MadeofTPU(ThermoPlasticUrethane)and
enclosingbubblesofaironthesideprotectors
only,theyactasanimpactabsorber.
Locatedonthesides,frontandrearofyour
vehicle,theyprotectthebodyworkbyreducing
theeffectofminoreverydayknocks:parking
dings,openingdoors,scrapes,...
Thesecolouredprotectorsalsoenhancethe
appearanceofyourvehicle.
AIRBUMP
®
protectors
AIRBUMP
®
protection areas
A. Side.
B. Front.
C. Rear.
Care of the AIRBUMP
®
panels
The AIRBUMP
®
panelsrequirenoparticular
careormaintenance.
Theyarecleanedsimplyusingwaterorone
oftheproductsavailablefromCITROËN
dealers.
Toavoidproblemsofprematureageingofthe
AIRBUMP
®
panels,donotusepolishonthem.
212
Practical information
Accessories
AwiderangeofaccessoriesandgenuinepartsisavailablefromtheCITROËNdealernetwork.
TheseaccessoriesandpartsareallsuitableforyourvehicleandbenefitfromCITROËN'srecommendationandwarranty.
"Comfort"
Doordeflectors,sidesunblinds,insulated
module,coathangerfixedtoheadrestraint,
mobilereadinglamp,frontandrearparking
sensors,portableashtray,scentedair
freshener,blindforsunroof...
"Transport systems"
Boot carpet, boot liner, boot net, boot spacers,
transverseroofbars,skicarrier,roofbox,
towbar,towbarwiringharness,bicyclecarrier...
"Styling"
Leathergearleverknob,aluminiumfootrest,
alloywheels,frontspoiler,reardiffuser,exterior
expressivestickers...
"Security and safety":
Anti-intrusionalarm,vehicletrackingsystem,
firstaidkit,fireextinguisher,warningtriangle,
highvisibilityvest,wheelsecuritybolts,snow
chains,non-slipcovers,frontfoglampkit,dog
guard,petseatbelt,seatbeltcutter/glass
hammer...
"Protection"
Mats*,seatcovers,mudflaps,vehiclecover,
boot...
Ifatowbarandwiringharnessare
fittedoutsidetheCITROËNdealer
network,theinstallationmustbedone
strictlyinlinewiththemanufacturer's
recommendations.
* Toavoidanyriskofjammingthepedals:
- ensurethatmatsarecorrectlypositioned
andsecured,
- neverfitonematontopofanother.
213
9
Practical information
Thefittingofelectricalequipment
or accessories which are not
recommendedbyCITROËNmayresult
inafailureofyourvehicle'selectronic
systemandexcessiveelectrical
consumption.
ContactaCITROËNdealer
forinformationontherangeof
recommendedequipmentand
accessories.
Installation of radio
communication
transmitters
Beforeinstallinganyafter-marketradio
communicationtransmitter,youcan
contactaCITROËNdealerforthe
specificationoftransmitterswhichcan
befitted(frequency,maximumpower,
aerial position, specific installation
requirements),inlinewiththeVehicle
ElectromagneticCompatibility
Directive(2004/104/EC).
Dependingonthelegislationinforcein
thecountry,certainsafetyequipment
maybecompulsory:highvisibility
safetyvests,warningtriangles,
breathalyzers, spare bulbs, spare fuses,
fireextinguisher,firstaidkit,mudflaps
attherearofthevehicle.
"Multimedia"
Bluetoothhands-freesystem,portablesatellite
navigationsystem,drivingassistancesystems,
smartphonecarrier,DVDplayer,CDplayer,
230Vsocket,semi-integralsatellitenavigation
system,rearmultimediacarrier,navigation
mappingupdates,aftermarketdigitalradio...
ByvisitingaCITROËNdealeryoucanalso
obtaincleaningandmaintenanceproducts
(interiorandexterior)-includingecological
productsinthe"TECHNATURE"range,
productsfortoppingup(screenwash...),paint
touch-uppensandaerosolsfortheexact
colourofyourvehicle,refills(sealantcartridge
forthetemporarypuncturerepairkit...),...
214
Practical information
Adviceoncareandmaintenance
Recommendationsonthecareandmaintenanceyourvehiclearegiveninthemaintenanceandwarrantyguide.
Theheadlampshavepolycarbonate
lenses,finishedwithaprotective
lacquer.
Donotcleanthemwithadryor
abrasivecloth,norwithdetergentor
solventproducts.
Useaspongeandsoapywater.
Theuseofahighpressurejetwash
forcleaningtheheadlamps,lamps
andtheirsurroundsmaydamagethe
lacquerandseals.
Observetherecommendationson
pressureanddistanceforjetwashing.
First clean persistent stains with a
spongeandwarmsoapywater.
Forthecareofthestickersintherear
doorglasses,werecommendthe
following:
- Useawidejetatatemperatureof
between25°Cand40°C.
- Wherepossible,directthejetat
rightanglestothestickers.
Leather
Care of the expressive stickers
Thesestylingstickersaretreatedtogivegood
resistancetoageingandtearing.
Theyhavebeendesignedtoallowyouto
customiseyourvehicle'sbodywork.
Whenusingahighpressurejetwash,keepthe
endofthelanceatleast30centimetresfrom
thestickers
Leatherisanaturalproduct.Appropriate
regularcareandcleaningisessentialforits
durability.
Refertoyourvehicle'smaintenanceand
warrantyguideforinformationonthespecial
precautionstoobserve.
Headlamps and lamps Care of the AIRBUMP
®
panels
The AIRBUMP
®
panelsrequirenoparticular
careormaintenance.
Theyarecleanedsimplyusingwateroroneof
theproductsavailablefromCITRNdealers.
Toavoidproblemsofprematureageingofthe
AIRBUMP
®
panels,donotusepolishonthem.
215
10
Checks
TOTAL & CITROËN
Partners in performance and
protecting the environment
Innovation in the search for
performance
Forover40year,theTOTALResearchand
Developmentdepartmentshavedevelopedfor
CITROËN,lubricantstomatchthelatesttechnical
innovationsonCITROËNvehicles,bothforcompetition
andforeverydaymotoring.
For you, this is an assurance that you will obtain of the
bestperformanceforyourengine.
Optimum protection for
your engine
ByhavingyourCITROËNvehicle
servicedwithTOTALlubricants,youare
contributingtowardsimprovingthelife
andperformancesofyourengine,while
alsoprotectingtheenvironment.
prefers
216
Checks
Bonnet
F Openthelefthandfrontdoor.
The location of the interior bonnet
releaseleverpreventsopeningofthe
bonnetwhenthelefthandfrontdoor
isshut.
Whentheengineishot,handlethe
exteriorsafetycatchandthestaywith
care(riskofburns),usingtheprotected
area.
Whenthebonnetisopen,takecarenot
todamagethesafetycatch.
F Liftthesafetycatchandraisethebonnet.
F Unclipthestayfromitshousingandplace
itinthesupportslottoholdthebonnet
open.
Opening
F Pullthereleaselever,locatedatthebottom
ofthedooraperture,towardsyou.
The cooling fan may start after
switching off the engine: take care
with articles and clothing that might
be caught by the fan blades.
Donotopenthebonnetundervery
windyconditions.
Closing
F Takethestayoutofitssupportslot.
F Clipthestaybackintoitshousing.
F Lowerthebonnetandreleaseitattheend
ofitstravel.
F Pullonthebonnettocheckthatithas
latchedcorrectly.
Because of the presence of electrical
equipmentunderthebonnet,itis
recommendedthatexposuretowater
(rain,washing,...)belimited.
Beforedoinganythingunderthe
bonnet, switch off the Stop & Start
systemtoavoidanyriskofinjury
resultingfromanautomaticchangeto
STARTmode.
217
10
Checks
1. Screenwashfluidreservoir.
2. Coolantheadertank.
3. Brakefluidreservoir.
4. Battery.
5. Fusebox.
6. Airfilter.
7. Engineoildipstick.
8. Engineoilfillercap.
Petrolengines
218
Checks
1. Screenwashfluidreservoir.
2. Coolantheadertank.
3. Brakefluidreservoir.
4. Battery.
5. Fusebox.
6. Airfilter.
7. Engineoildipstick.
8. Engineoilfillercap.
9. Primingpump*.
Dieselengines
*Accordingtoengine.
219
10
Checks
Checkinglevels
Takecarewhenworkingunderthebonnet,ascertainareasoftheenginemaybeextremelyhot(riskofburns)andthecoolingfancouldstartat
anytime(evenwiththeignitionoff).
Engine oil level
Thecheckiscarriedouteitherwhen
theignitionisswitchedonusingthe
oillevelindicatorintheinstrument
panelforvehiclessoequipped,or
usingthedipstick.
Checking using the dipstick
Refertothe"Petrolengine"or"Dieselengine"
sectionforthelocationofthedipstickinthe
enginecompartmentofyourvehicle.
F Takethedipstickbyitscolouredgripand
removeitcompletely.
F Wipetheendofthedipstickusingaclean
non-fluffycloth.
F Refitthedipstickandpushfullydown,then
pullitoutagaintomakethevisualcheck:
thecorrectlevelisbetweenthemarksA
andB.
Checkalloftheselevelsregularly,inlinewiththemanufacturer'sserviceschedule.Topthemupifnecessary,unlessotherwiseindicated.
Ifaleveldropssignificantly,havethecorrespondingsystemcheckedbyaCITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
IfyoufindthatthelevelisabovetheAmarkor
below the Bmark,do not start the engine.
- IfthelevelisabovetheMAXmark(risk
ofdamagetotheengine),contacta
CITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
- IfthelevelisbelowtheMINmark,you
musttopuptheengineoil.
A = MAX
B = MIN
Toensurethatthereadingiscorrect,
yourvehiclemustbeparkedonalevel
surfacewiththeenginehavingbeenoff
formorethan30minutes.
Itisnormaltotopuptheoillevelbetween
twoservices(oroilchanges).CITROËN
recommendsthatyoucheckthelevel,andtop
upifnecessary,every3000miles(5000kms).
220
Checks
Aftertoppinguptheoil,thecheckwhen
switchingontheignitionwiththeoil
levelindicatorintheinstrumentpanel
isnotvalidduringthe30minutesafter
toppingup.
Oil grade
Beforetopping-uptheoilorchangingtheoil,
checkthattheoilisthecorrectgradeforyour
engineandconformstothemanufacturer's
recommendations.
Topping up the engine oil level
Refertothe"Petrolengine"or"Dieselengine"
section for the location of the oil filler cap in the
enginecompartmentofyourvehicle.
F Unscrew the oil filler cap to reveal the filler
aperture.
F Addoilinsmallquantities,avoidingany
spillsonenginecomponents(riskoffire).
F Waitafewminutesbeforecheckingthe
levelagainusingthedipstick.
F Addmoreoilifnecessary.
F Aftercheckingthelevel,carefullyrefitthe
oilfillercapandthedipstickinitstube.
Engine oil change
Refertothemanufacturer'sserviceschedule
fordetailsoftheintervalforthisoperation.
Inordertomaintainthereliabilityoftheengine
andemissioncontrolsystem,neveruse
additivesintheengineoil.
221
10
Checks
Coolant level
Thecoolantlevelshouldbeclose
tothe"MAX"markbutshouldnever
exceedit.
Inaddition,asthecoolingsystemis
pressurised,waitatleastonehourafter
switchingofftheenginebeforecarryingoutany
work.
Toavoidanyriskofscalding,unscrewthecap
bytwoturnstoallowthepressuretodrop.
Whenthepressurehasdropped,removethe
capandtopupthelevel.
Changing the coolant
Thecoolantdoesnothavetobereplacedatroutineservices.
Thebrakefluidlevelshouldbeclose
tothe"MAX"mark.Ifitisnot,check
thebrakepadwear.
Brake fluid level
Changing the uid
Refertothemanufacturer'sserviceschedule
fordetailsoftheintervalforthisoperation.
Fluid specication
Thebrakefluidmustconformtothe
manufacturer'srecommendations.
The cooling fan may start after switching
off the engine: take care with articles and
clothing that might be caught by the fan
blades.
Whentheengineiswarm,thetemperatureof
thecoolantisregulatedbythefan.
Fluid specication
Thecoolantmustconformtothe
manufacturer'srecommendations.
222
Checks
Avoidprolongedcontactofusedoilor
fluidswiththeskin.
Mostofthesefluidsareharmfulto
healthorindeedverycorrosive.
Donotdiscardusedoilorfluidsinto
sewersorontotheground.
TakeusedoiltoaCITROËNdealeror
aqualifiedworkshop(France)ortoan
authorisedwastedisposalsite.
Used products
Topping up
Thereservoirmustbetoppedupwithoutdelay
byaCITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
Diesel fuel additive level
(Diesel with particle filter)
Theadditivereservoirlowlevelis
indicatedbyfixedilluminationof
thiswarninglamp,accompaniedby
anaudiblesignalandamessage
thattheparticlefilteradditivelevel
istoolow.
Fluid specication
Foroptimumcleaningandtoavoidfreezing,
thisfluidmustnotbetoppeduporreplaced
withplainwater.
Inwintryconditions,itisrecommendedthatyou
useanethylalcoholormethanolbasedfluid.
Screenwash fluid level
Topupthelevelwhennecessary.
223
10
Checks
Checks
12 V battery
Thebatterydoesnotrequireanymaintenance.
However,checkthattheterminalsareclean
andcorrectlytightened,particularlyinsummer
andwinter.
Refertothemanufacturer's
serviceschedulefordetailsofthe
replacementintervalsforthese
components.
Air filter and passenger compartment filter
Replacetheoilfiltereachtimethe
engineoilischanged.
Refertothemanufacturer's
serviceschedulefordetailsof
thereplacementintervalforthis
component.
Oil filter
The presence of this label, in particular with
theStop&Startsystem,indicatestheuseof
aspecific12Vlead-acidbatterywithspecial
technologyandspecification.Theinvolvement
ofaCITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshop
isessentialwhenreplacingordisconnecting
thebattery.
Unlessotherwiseindicated,checkthesecomponentsinaccordancewiththemanufacturer'sservicescheduleandaccordingtoyourengine.
Otherwise,havethemcheckedbyaCITRNdealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
Dependingontheenvironment(e.g.dusty
atmosphere)andtheuseofthevehicle
(e.g.citydriving),replace them twice as often
if necessary.
Acloggedpassengercompartmentfiltermay
haveanadverseeffectontheperformance
oftheairconditioningsystemandgenerate
undesirableodours.
Particle filter (Diesel)
The start of saturation of the
particlefilterisindicatedbythe
fixedilluminationofthiswarning
lampaccompaniedbyawarning
message.
Assoonasthetrafficconditionspermit,
regeneratethefilterbydrivingata
speedofatleast40mph(60km/h)until
thewarninglampgoesoff.
Ifthewarninglampstayson,this
indicatesalowadditivelevel.
On a new vehicle, the first particle
filterregenerationoperationsmaybe
accompaniedbya"burning"smell,
whichisperfectlynormal.
Followingprolongedoperationofthe
vehicleatverylowspeedoratidle,
youmay,inexceptionalcircumstances,
noticetheemissionofwatervapourat
theexhaustonacceleration.Thisdoes
not affect the behaviour of the vehicle
ortheenvironment.
Whencarryingoutworkonthebattery,refer
tothe"12Vbattery"sectionfordetailsofthe
precautionstobetakenbeforedisconnecting
thebatteryandfollowingitsreconnection.
224
Checks
Brakeweardependsonthestyle
ofdriving,particularlyinthecase
ofvehiclesusedintown,overshort
distances.Itmaybenecessaryto
Brake pads
Forinformationoncheckingbrake
discwear,contactaCITROËNdealer
oraqualifiedworkshop.
Brake disc wear
Onlyuseproductsrecommendedby
CITROËNorproductsofequivalent
qualityandspecification.
Inordertooptimisetheoperationof
unitsasimportantasthoseinthe
brakingsystem,CITRNselectsand
offersveryspecificproducts.
Afterwashingthevehicle,dampness,
orinwintryconditions,icecanform
onthebrakediscsandpads:braking
efficiencymaybereduced.Makelight
brakeapplicationstodryanddefrost
thebrakes.
Manual gearbox
Thegearboxdoesnotrequireany
maintenance(nooilchange).
Refertothemanufacturer'sservice
scheduleforthecheckingintervalfor
thiscomponent.
Electronic gearbox
Thegearboxdoesnotrequireany
maintenance(nooilchange).
Refertothemanufacturer'sservice
schedulefordetailsofthechecking
intervalforthiscomponent.
Parking brake
Ifexcessivetraveloralossof
effectivenessofthissystemis
noticed,theparkingbrakemustbe
checked,evenbetweentwoservices.
Checkingthissystemmustbedonebya
CITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
Toavoiddamagingtheelectricalunits,
never useahighpressurejetwashin
theenginecompartment.
havetheconditionofthebrakeschecked,even
betweenvehicleservices.
Unlessthereisaleakinthecircuit,adropin
thebrakefluidlevelindicatesthatthebrake
padsareworn.
225
11
Technical data
Engine PureTech 75 PureTech 82 PureTech 82 S&S PureTech 110 S&S
Gearbox
Manual
(5-speed)
Manual
(5-speed)
ETGelectronic
(5-speed)
Manual
(5-speed)
Model code 0PHMU 0PHMZ 0PHNZ
Cubiccapacity(cc) 1199 1199 1199
Borexstroke(mm) 75x90.5 75x90.5 75x90.5
Maxpower:EUstandard(kW)* 55 60 81
Maxpowerenginespeed(rpm) 5750 5750 5500
Maxtorque:EUstandard(Nm) 116 118 205
Maxtorqueenginespeed(rpm) 2750 2750 1500
Fuel Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded
Catalytic converter yes yes yes
Engineoilcapacitywithreplacementoftheoil
filter(inlitres)
3.25 3.25 3.5
*Themaximumpowercorrespondstothetypeapprovedvalueonatestbed,underconditionsdefinedbyEuropeanlegislation(directive1999/99/EC).
Enginesandgearboxes-PETROL
226
Technical data
Engine PureTech 75 PureTech 82 PureTech 82 S&S PureTech 110 S&S
Gearbox
Manual
(5-speed)
Manual
(5-speed)
ETGelectronic
(5-speed)
Manual
(5-speed)
Model code 0PHMU 0PHMZ 0PHNZ
- Unladenweight 965 965 975 1020
- Kerbweight* 1040 1040 1050 1095
- Grossvehicleweight(GVW) 1500 1500 1510 1555
- Grosstrainweight(GTW)
ona12%gradient
1900 1900 1910 2155
- Brakedtrailer**
ona10%or12%gradient
720 720 725 825
- Unbrakedtrailer** 520 520 525 545
- Recommendednoseweight(towbar) 55 55 55 55
Weightsandtowedloads(inkg)-PETROL
TheGTWandtowedloadvaluesindicatedarevaliduptoamaximumaltitudeof1000metres;thetowedloadmentionedmustbereducedby10%for
eachadditional1000metresofaltitude.
Neverexceed60mph(100km/h)whentowing(complywiththelegislationinforceinyourcountry).
Highambienttemperaturesmayresultinareductionintheperformanceofthevehicletoprotecttheengine;iftheambienttemperatureisabove37°C,
limitthetowedload.
*Thekerbweightisequaltotheunladenweight+driver(75kg).
**MaximumtrailerweightwithintheGTWlimit.
227
11
Technical data
Engine e-HDi 92 BlueHDi 100
Gearbox
ETGelectronic
(6-speed)
Manual
(5-speed)
Model code 0B9HP 0BBHY
Cubiccapacity(cc) 1560 1560
Borexstroke(mm) 75x88.3 75x88.3
Maxpower:EUstandard(kW)* 68 73
Maxpowerenginespeed(rpm) 4000 3750
Maxtorque:EUstandard(Nm) 230 254
Maxtorqueenginespeed(rpm) 1750 1750
Fuel Diesel Diesel
Catalytic converter yes yes
Particle filter yes yes
Engineoilcapacitywithreplacementoftheoil
filter(inlitres)
3.75 3.75
*Themaximumpowercorrespondstothevaluetypeapprovedonatestbed,underconditionsdefinedbyEuropeanlegislation(Directive1999/99/EC).
Enginesandgearboxes-DIESEL
228
Technical data
Engine e-HDi 92 BlueHDi 100
Gearbox
ETGelectronic
(6-speed)
Manual
(5-speed)
Model code 0B9HP 0BBHY
- Unladenweight 1055 1070
- Kerbweight* 1130 1145
- Grossvehicleweight(GVW) 1605 1610
- Grosstrainweight(GTW)
ona12%gradient
2205 2210
- Brakedtrailer(withinGTWlimit)
ona10%or12%gradient
825 825
- Unbrakedtrailer 565 570
- Recommendednoseweight(towbar) 55 55
Weightsandtowedloads(inkg)-DIESEL
*Thekerbweightisequaltotheunladenweight+driver(75kg).
TheGTWandtowedloadvaluesindicatedarevaliduptoamaximumaltitudeof1000metres;thetowedloadmentionedmustbereducedby10%for
eachadditional1000metresofaltitude.
Neverexceed60mph(100km/h)whentowing(complywiththelegislationinforceinyourcountry).
Highambienttemperaturesmayresultinareductionintheperformanceofthevehicletoprotecttheengine;iftheambienttemperatureisabove37°C,
limitthetowedload.
229
11
Technical data
Dimensions(inmm)
Thesedimensionshavebeenmeasuredonavehiclethatisnotloaded.
230
Technical data
Identicationmarkings
Variousvisiblemarkingsfortheidentificationofyourvehicle.
A. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
under the bonnet.
Thisnumberisengravedonthechassis
neartherighthandfrontwheelarch.
Thetyrepressuresmustbechecked
whenthetyresarecold,atleastonce
amonth.
If the tyre pressures are too low, this
increasesfuelconsumption.
C. Manufacturer's label.
Thisself-destroyinglabelonthemiddle
doorpillar,rightorlefthandside,contains
thefollowinginformation:
- themanufacturer'sname,
- theEuropeanwholevehicletype
approvalnumber,
- thevehicleidentificationnumber(VIN),
- themaximumauthorisedweight(gross
vehicleweight),
- themaximumauthorisedweightwith
trailer(grosstrainweight),
- themaximumfrontaxleweight,
- themaximumrearaxleweight.
D. Tyre/paint label.
Thislabelonthemiddledoorpillar,driver's
side,containsthefollowinginformation:
- thetyreinflationpressures,ladenand
unladen,
- thetyresizes(includingthetyreload
indexandspeedrating),
- theinflationpressureforthespare
wheel,
- thepaintcolourcode.
B. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) on
the windscreen lower cross member.
Thisnumberisindicatedonaself-
adhesivelabelwhichisvisiblethrough
thewindscreen.
231
EMERGENCY OR ASSISTANCE CALL
232
EMERGENCY OR ASSISTANCE CALL
CITROËN Localised Emergency Call
Inanemergency,pressthisbuttonformorethan
2seconds.FlashingofthegreenLEDandavoice
messageconrmthatthecallhasbeenmadetothe
CITROËNLocalisedEmergencyCallcentre*.
Pressingthisbuttonagainimmediatelycancelsthecall.ThegreenLED
goesoff.
Pressingthisbutton(atanytime)formorethan8secondscancelsthe
call.
CITROËN Localised Assistance Call
Whentheignitionisswitchedon,thegreen
LEDcomesonfor3secondsindicating
thatthesystemisoperatingcorrectly.
IftheorangeLEDashes:thereisa
systemfault.
IftheorangeLEDisoncontinuously:the
backupbatterymustbereplaced.
In either case, contact a CITROËN
dealer.
Pressingthisbuttonagainimmediatelycancelstherequest.
Thecancellationisconrmedbyavoicemessage.
Pressthisbuttonformorethan2secondstorequest
assistanceifthevehiclebreaksdown.
Avoicemessageconrmsthatthecallhasbeenmade*.
Operation of the system
ThegreenLEDremainson(withoutashing)whencommunicationis
established.Itgoesoffattheendofcommunication.
ThiscallisdealtwithbytheCITROËNLocalisedEmergencyCallcentre
whichreceiveslocatinginformationfromthevehicleandcansenda
detailedalerttotheappropriateemergencyservices.Incountriesin
whichtheteamisnotoperational,orwhenthelocatingservicehas
beenexpresslydeclined,thecallisdealtwithdirectlybytheemergency
services(112)withoutthevehiclelocation.
Ifanimpactisdetectedbytheairbagcontrolunit,and
independentlyofthedeploymentofanyairbags,anemergencycall
ismadeautomatically.
* Theseservicesaresubjecttoconditionsandavailability.
ConsultaCITROËNdealer.
IfyoupurchasedyourvehicleoutsidetheCITROËNdealernetwork,
weinviteyoutohaveadealercheckthecongurationoftheseservices
and,ifdesired,modiedtosuityourwishes.Inamulti-lingualcountry,
congurationispossibleintheofcialnationallanguageofyourchoice.
Fortechnicalreasons,particularlytoimprovethequalityofTelematic
servicestocustomers,themanufacturerreservestherighttocarryout
updatestothevehicle'son-boardtelematicsystem.
IfyoubenetfromtheCITROËNConnectBoxoffer,youalsohaveavailable
additionalservicesinyourMyCITROËNpersonalspace,viatheCITROËN
Internetwebsiteinyourcountry,accessibleonwww.citroen.com.
233
Thesystemisprotectedinsuchawaythatitwillonly
operateinyourvehicle.
7-inch touch screen tablet
01 General operation
Forsafetyreasons,thedrivermustcarryoutoperations
whichrequireprolongedattentionwhilethevehicleis
stationary.
Whentheengineisswitchedoffandtoprevent
dischargingofthebattery,thesystemswitchesoff
followingtheactivationoftheenergyeconomymode.
CONTENTS
02 First steps - Control panel
04 Media
05 Navigation
06 Configuration
07 Connected services
08 Telephone
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
Frequently asked questions p.
GPS satellite navigation system
Multimedia audio system
Bluetooth
®
telephone
234
236
256
238
276
286
288
298
03 Steering mounted controls p. 237
01
"Air conditioning"
allows control of the
settingsfortemperature
andairow.
"Driving assistance"
allows access to the trip
computerandcertain
vehicle functions to be
activated,deactivated
andadjusted.
"Media"
allows selection of a
radiostation,thevarious
musicsourcesandthe
displayofphotographs.
"Navigation"*
allowssettingsfor
navigationandthechoice
ofadestination.
"Conguration"
allowssoundsettings
andthebrightnessof
instrumentsandcontrols
tobeadjustedandgives
access to the interactive
helpforthemainvehicle
systemsandwarning
lamps.
"Connected services"*
allows connection to
an applications portal
tofacilitate,make
safeandpersonalise
journeysbymeansofa
connectionkeyavailable
onsubscriptionfroma
CITROËNdealer.
"Telephone"
allows the connection of
amobiletelephonevia
Bluetooth.
GENERAL OPERATION
234
*
Dependingonequipment.
01
Usethebuttonsoneithersideofthetouchscreentabletforaccesstothemenus,thenpress
thevirtualbuttonsinthetouchscreentablet.
Eachmenuisdisplayedinoneortwopages(primarypageandsecondarypage).
GENERAL OPERATION
Inveryhotconditions,thesystemmaygointostand-by(screenandsoundcompletelyoff)foraminimumperiodof5minutes.
Secondarypage
235
Primarypage
02
236
Selectingtheaudiosource(dependingonversion):
- "FM"/"AM"/"DAB"*stations.
- "USB"memorystick.
- Jukebox*,afterrstcopyingaudiolestotheinternalmemoryofthesystem.
- TelephoneconnectedbyBluetooth*andaudiostreamingBluetooth*(streaming).
- Mediaplayerconnectedtotheauxiliarysocket(jack,cablenotsupplied).
Thescreenisofthe"resistive"type,itisnecessarytopressrmly,particularlyfor"ick"gestures(scrollingthroughalist,movingthemap...).
Asimplewipewillnotbeenough.Pressingwithmorethanonengerisnotrecognised.
Thescreencanbeusedwhenwearinggloves.Thistechnologyallowsuseatalltemperatures.
FIRST STEPS
*Dependingonequipment.
Tocleanthescreen,useasoftnon-abrasivecloth(spectaclescloth)withoutanyadditionalproduct.
Donotusepointedobjectsonthescreen.
Donottouchthescreenwithwethands.
Withtheenginerunning,presstomute
thesound.
Withtheignitionoff,presstoswitchthe
systemon.
Volumeadjustment(eachsource
isindependent,includingTrafc
announcements(TA)andnavigation
instructions).
Followingprolongedoperationin
sunnyconditions,thevolumemay
belimitedtoprotectthesystem.The
returntonormaltakesplacewhen
thetemperatureinthepassenger
compartmentdrops.
Short-cuts:usingthetouchbuttonsinthe
upperbandofthetouchscreentablet,itis
possibletogodirectlytotheselectionof
audiosource,thelistofstations
(ortitles,dependingonthesource)orto
thetemperaturesetting.
03
237
STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS
- Shortpress:
Changethemultimediasource.
Acceptanincomingcall.
Callinprogress:accesstothe
telephonemenu(Endcall,Secret
mode,Hands-freemode).
- Longpress:
Rejectanincomingcall.
Endacallinprogress.
Otherthancallinprogress:accessto
thetelephonemenu(Dial,Contacts,
Calllog,Answerphone).
- Rotation.
Radio:automaticsearchfor
previous/nextstation.
Media:previous/nexttrack.
- Press:conrmation.
- Shortpress:
Radio:displaythelistofstations.
Media:displaythelistoftracks.
- Longpress:updatethelistofstations
received.
- Increasevolume.
- Decreasevolume.
04
238
MEDIA
Level 1 Level 2
List of FM stations
"Media"
Primary page
Preset
239
Level 1 Level 2 Comments
Media
List
List of FM stations
Pressonaradiostationtoselectit.
Media
Source
FM Radio
Selectchangeofsource
DAB Radio
AM Radio
Jukebox
USB
iPod
Bluetooth
AUX
Media
Preset
PressanemptylocationtoPresetit.
04
240
MEDIA
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Media
Photos
Manage Jukebox
240
"Media"
Secondary page
List of FM stations
Copy to Jukebox
241
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Media
Secondary page
Radio list
Preset
Pressaradiostationtoselectit.
Update list
Updatethelistofstationsreceived.
Frequency
Enterthedesiredradiofrequency.
Conrm
Savethesettings.
Media
Secondary page
Photos
Page selection
Displaytheselectedphotofullscreen.
Rotate
Rotatethephoto90°.
Select all
Selectallthephotosinthelist.
Pressagaintodeselect.
Slideshow
Previousphoto.
Displaythephotosinsequence,fullscreen.
Pause/Play.
Nextphoto.
Conrm
Savethesettings.
Media
Secondary page
Manage Jukebox
Sort by folder
Choosetheselectionmode.
Sort by album
Select all
Magnifying glass
Createfolder
Choosethehandlingmode.
Rename
Delete
Select all
Conrm
Savetheoptions.
Copy
CopylestotheJukebox.
04
242
MEDIA
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
"Media"
Secondary page
Media
Settings
Settings
Settings
243
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Media
Secondary page
Media list
Presentationofthelastmediaused.
Media
Secondary page
Settings
Media
Settings
Random(alltracks):
Choosetheplaysettings.
Random(currentalbum):
Loop:
Aux.amplication
Radio
Settings
RDS options
Activateordeactivatetheoptions.
DAB/FMoptions
DisplayRadioText
DABradiothumbnails
Announcements
Settings
Trafcannouncements(TA)
Activateordeactivatetheoptions.
Weather
Varied-Sport
Alertsettings
Conrm
Savethesettings.
04
Selecting a station
Theexteriorenvironment(hills,buildings,tunnel,carpark,belowground...)maypreventreception,eveninRDSstationtrackingmode.
Thisphenomenonisnormalinthepropagationofradiowavesandisinnowayindicativeofafaultwiththeaudiosystem.
Select "List"intheprimarypage.
or
Select "Radio list"inthesecondarypage.
Press on Mediatodisplaytheprimarypage.
or
Press on Mediatodisplaytheprimarypage
thengotothesecondarypage.
Selectaradiostationfromthelistoffered.
Ifnecessary,selectchangeofsource.
Press Mediatodisplaytheprimary
pagethenselect"Preset".
Select "FM Radio" or "AM Radio".
OR
Select "Update list"torefreshthelist.
RADIO
Selectapresetradiostationinthelist.
244
04
245
Changing a radio frequency
By alphabetical list
Pressthecurrentradiobandthen
choosetheradiostationfromthelist
offered.
Press on Mediatodisplaytheprimary
pagethenpressonthesecondary
page.
Enterthefrequencyinfull(e.g.:92.10MHz)
usingthekeypadthen"Conrm".
By automatic frequency search
Press 3 or 4tomovethecursor
foranautomaticsearchdownorup
foraradiofrequency.
Press on Mediatodisplaytheprimary
page.
Press on "Enter frequency"todisplay
theprimarypagethenpressonthe
secondarypage.
OR
RADIO
Selectchangesource.
Select "FM Radio" or "AM Radio".
THEN
OR
04
Preset a station
Press on "Preset".
Selectaradiostationorfrequency
(refertothecorrespondingsection).
Selectanumberinthelisttopresetthe
previouslychosenradiostation.
Alongpressonanumberpresets(memorises)
thestation.
Or
A press on this button presets all of the stations
oneaftertheother.
Recall pre-set stations
Press on Mediatodisplaytheprimarypage
then select "Save".
RADIO
246
04
247
RADIO
Activate/ Deactivate RDS
Select "Settings".
Press on Mediatodisplaytheprimarypage
thengotothesecondarypage.
Select "Radio".
Activate/deactivate"RDS options".
RDS,ifactivated,allowsyoutocontinuelisteningtothesame
stationbyautomaticretuningtoalternativefrequencies.However,in
certainconditions,coverageofanRDSstationmaynotbeassured
throughouttheentirecountryasradiostationsdonotcover100%of
theterritory.Thisexplainsthelossofreceptionofthestationduring
ajourney.
04
248
RADIO
Displayofoptions:
ifactivebutnotavailable,thedisplaywillbegreyedout,
ifactiveandavailable,thedisplaywillbeblank.
Displayof"Radiotext"forthe
currentstation.
ManagetheJukebox.
Displaycurrentaction.
Selecttheaudiosource.
Displaythe"DAB"band.
Display of the
nameofthecurrent
station.
Short-cut:accesstothechoiceof
audiosource,thelistofstations(or
titlesdependingonthesource)or
temperatureadjustment.
Selecttheradio
station.
Ifthe"DAB"radiostationbeing
listenedtoisnotavailableon"FM",
the"DABFM"optionisgreyedout.
Anythumbnailbroadcastby
thestation.
Presetstations,buttons1
to15.
Shortpress:selectthe
presetradiostation.
Longpress:presetaradio
station.
Next"Multiplex".
Nextradiostation.
Secondarypage.
Displaythenameand
numberofthemultiplex
servicebeingused.
Previous"Multiplex".
Previousradiostation.
Journaline
®
isatext-basedinformationservicedesignedfordigitalradiosystems.
Itprovidestext-basedinformationstructuredaroundtopicsandsub-topics.
Thisserviceisavailablefromthe"LISTOFDABSTATIONS"page.
04
249
RADIO
If"DAB/FMautotracking"isactivated,thereisadifferenceofa
fewsecondswhenthesystemswitchesto"FM"analogueradiowith
sometimesavariationinvolume.
Whenthedigitalsignalisrestored,thesystemautomatically
changesbackto"DAB".
Selectchangeofsource.
Press on Mediatodisplaytheprimarypage.
Select "DAB Radio".
Select "List"intheprimarypage.
or
Select "Radio list"inthesecondarypage.
Selecttheradiostationfromthelistoffered.
Digitalradioprovideshigherqualityreceptionandalsothe
graphicaldisplayofcurrentinformationontheradiostationbeing
listenedto.Select"List"intheprimarypage.
Therangeofmultiplexesavailableisdisplayedinalphabetical
order.
Press Mediatodisplaytheprimarypagethen
pressonthesecondarypage.
Select "Settings".
Select "RADIO".
Select "Digital/FM auto tracking" then
"Conrm".
"DAB"doesnotcover100%oftheterritory.
Whenthedigitalradiosignalisweak,"DAB/FMautotracking"
allowsyoutocontinuelisteningtothesamestation,by
automaticallyswitchingtothecorresponding"FM"analogue
station(ifthereisone).
Ifthe"DAB"stationbeinglistenedtoisnotavailableon"FM"("DAB/
FM"optiongreyedout),or"DAB/FMautotracking"isnotactivated,
thesoundwillcutoutwhilethedigitalsignalistooweak.
Digital radio - DAB / FM auto tracking
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting)
Digital radio
04
250
USB player, auxiliary input
InserttheUSBmemorystickintotheUSBportorconnecttheUSB
peripheraltotheUSBportusingasuitablecable(notsupplied)
Thesystembuildsplaylists(intemporarymemory),anoperation
whichcantakefromafewsecondstoseveralminutesattherst
connection.
Reducethenumberofnon-musiclesandthenumberoffoldersto
reducethewaitingtime.
Theplaylistsareupdatedeverytimetheignitionisswitchedofforon
connectionofaUSBmemorystick.However,thesystemmemorises
theselistsandiftheyarenotmodied,theloadingtimewillbe
shorter.
Selection of source
ThesteeringmountedSRC(source)buttoncanbeusedtogotothe
nextmediasource,availableifthesourceisactive.
Press OKtoconrmtheselection.
"USB, iPod"
"Bluetooth (streaming)"
"Auxiliary"
"Radio"
Selectchangeofsourcethenchoosethe
source.
Press on Mediatodisplaytheprimarypage.
MUSIC
04
251
USB player
Theaudioequipmentwillonlyplayaudioleswith".wma,.aac,
.ac,.oggand.mp3"leextensionsandwithabitrateofbetween
32Kbpsand320Kbps.
ItalsosupportsVBR(VariableBitRate)mode.
Noothertypeofle(.mp4,...)canbeplayed.
WMAlesmustbeofthestandardwma9type.
Thesamplingratessupportedare11,22,44and48KHz.
Itisadvisabletorestrictlenamesto20characters,withoutusingof
specialcharacters(e.g.:""?;ù)toavoidanyplayinganddisplaying
problems.
Information and advice
ThesystemsupportsUSBmassstoragedevices,BlackBerry
®
devicesorApple
®
playersviaUSBports.Theadaptorcablenot
supplied.
Controloftheperipheraldeviceiswiththeaudiosystemcontrols.
Otherperipherals,notrecognisedonconnection,mustbeconnected
totheauxiliarysocketusingaJackcable(notsupplied).
UseonlyUSBmemorysticksformattedFAT32(28-bitleallocation
table).
MUSIC
Thesystemdoesnotsupporttwoidenticaldevicesconnectedatthe
sametime(twomemorysticks,twoApple
®
players)butitispossible
toconnectonememorystickandoneApple
®
playeratthesame
time.
ItisrecommendedthatgenuineApple
®
USBcablesareusedto
ensurecorrectoperation.
04
/
/
Selecting a track to play
Previoustrack.
Nexttrack.
Previousfolder.
Nextfolder.
ListofUSBtracksandfolders.
Upordowninthelist.
Conrm,nextmenulevel.
Uponemenulevel.
MUSIC
252
04
253
Audio streaming
Streamingallowsaudiolesonyourtelephonetobeplayedviathe
vehicle'sspeakers.
Connectthetelephone:seethe"Telephone" section, then
"Bluetooth".
Choose the "Audio" or "All"prole.
Ifplaydoesnotstartautomatically,itmaybenecessarytostartthe
audioplaybackfromthetelephone.
Controlisfromtheperipheraldeviceorbyusingtheaudiosystem
buttons.
Onceconnectedinstreamingmode,thetelephoneisconsideredto
beamediasource.
Itisrecommendedthatyouactivate"Repeat" on the Bluetooth
peripheral.
Connecting APPLE
®
players
Connect the Apple
®
player to one of the USB
portsusingasuitablecable(notsupplied).
Playstartsautomatically.
Controlisviatheaudiosystem.
Theclassicationsavailablearethoseoftheportabledevice
connected(artists/albums/genres/playlists/audiobooks/
podcasts).
Thedefaultclassicationusedisbyartist.Tomodifythe
classicationused,returntotherstlevelofthemenuthenselect
thedesiredclassication(playlistsforexample)andconrmtogo
downthroughthemenutothedesiredtrack.
Copiesofphotosandalbumartworkarenotcompatiblewiththe
audiosystem.TheseappearonlywithaUSBmemorystick.
MUSIC
Theversionofsoftwareintheaudiosystemmaynotbecompatible
withthegenerationofyourApple
®
player.
04
Using the auxiliary input (AUX)
(cable not supplied)
Connecttheportabledevice(MP3player…)totheauxiliaryJACK
socketusinganaudiocable.
Firstadjustthevolumeofyourportabledevice(toahighlevel).Then
adjustthevolumeofyouraudiosystem.
Displayandmanagementofthecontrolsareviatheportabledevice.
Selectchangethesource.
Select Mediatodisplaytheprimarypage.
Select the AUXILIARYsource.
MUSIC
254
04
255
Select "New folder"tocreateafolderstructure
intheJukeboxorselect"Keep structure" to
retainthestructurefromthedevice.
Selectthemagnifyingglasstoenterthefolder
oralbumandselectaudiolebyaudiole.
Managing the Jukebox
Select "Media list".
Connectthedevice(MP3player...)totheUSBportorauxiliaryJACK
socketusingasuitableaudiocable.
Select copy "Copy Jukebox".
MUSIC
Whennoaudioleiscopiedtothesystemwithacapacityof8GB,
alloftheJukeboxfunctionsymbolsaregreyedandarenotavailable.
Select "Sort by folder" or "Sort by album".
Select "Conrm" then "Copy".
Whilecopyingthesystemreturnstothe
primarypage;youcangobacktothecopyview
atanytimebyselectingthisbutton.
05
256
NAVIGATION
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
"Navigation"
Primary page
Route settings
Navigation
257
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Navigation
Settings
Navigation
Enter destination
Displayrecentdestinations
Calculatory criteria
Fastest
Choosethenavigationcriteria.
Themapdisplaystheroutechosenaccordingtothese
criteria.
Shortest
Time/distance
Ecological
Tolls
Ferries
Strict-Close
Showrouteonmap
Displaythemapandstartnavigation.
Conrm
Savetheoptions.
Save
Savethecurrentaddress.
Stop navigation
Deletethenavigationinformation.
Voice
Choosethevolumeforvoiceandannouncementofstreet
names.
Diversion
Detourfromyourinitialroutebyacertaindistance.
Navigation
Displayintextmode.
Zoomin.
Zoomout.
Displayinfullscreenmode.
Usethearrowstomovethemap.
Switchto2Dmap.
05
258
To use the telephone
functions, refer to the
"Communications"section.
Formanagingcontactsand
theiraddresses,refertothe
"Communications"section.
NAVIGATION
Search for a point of interest
Navigation
Address
Enter destination
Contacts
Point of interest displayed on the map
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
"Navigation"
Secondary page
Search for a POI by name
259
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Navigation
Secondary page
Enter destination
Address
Curr.location
Addresssettings
Points of Interest
Town centre
Save
Savethecurrentaddress.
Addwaypoint
Addawaypointtotheroute.
Navigateto
Presstocalculatetheroute.
Contacts
Addresses
Selectacontactthencalculatetheroute.
Addcontact
Addwaypoint
Search for contact
Navigateto
From map
Displaythemapandzoomtoviewtheroads.
Itinerary
Create,addordeleteawaypointorviewtheitinerary.
Stop
Deletenavigationinformation.
Navigate to
Presstocalculatetheroute.
Navigation
Secondary page
Search for POI
All POIs
Listofcategoriesavailable.
Afterchoosingthecategory,selectthepointsofinterest.
Garage
Dining/hotels
Personal
By name
Search
Savethesettings.
Navigation
Secondary page
Show POIs
Select all
ChoosethedisplaysettingsforPOIs.
Delete
Import POIs
Conrm
Savetheoptions.
05
Movingbetweenthe
twomenus.
NAVIGATION
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Trafc messages
Settings
Diversion
Map settings
"Navigation"
Secondary page
Navigation
Map settings
Settings
Settings
260
261
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Navigation
Secondary page
Trafc messages
On the route
Settingsforthechoiceofmessagesandthelterradius.
Around vehicle
Near destination
Detour
Detouroveradistance
Recalculate route
Finish
Savetheoptions.
Navigation
Secondary page
Map settings
Orientation
Flatviewnorthheading
Choosethedisplayandorientationofthemap.
Flatviewvehicleheading
Perspective view
Maps
Aspect
"Day"mapcolour
"Night"mapcolour
Automaticday/night
Conrm
Savethesettings.
Navigation
Secondary page
Settings
Route settings
Entersettingsandchoosethevolumeforthevoiceand
announcementofstreetnames.
Voice
Alert!
Trafc options
Conrm
Savetheoptions.
05
262
Towards a new destination
Choosing a new destination
Select "Enter destination".
Select "Save"tosavetheaddressenteredas
acontactentry.
Thesystemallowsupto200entries.
Select "Conrm" or press "Show route on
map"tostartnavigationguidance.
Select "Address".
Select the "Country:"fromthelistoffered
theninthesameway:
the "City:"oritspostcode,the"Road:",
the "N°:".Conrmeachtime.
Select "Navigate to".
Choosetherestrictioncriteria:"Include
tollroads", "Include ferries", "Trafc", "Strict",
"Close".
Choosethenavigationcriteria:"Fastest" or
"Shortest" or "Time/distance" or "Ecological".
Todeletenavigationinformation,presson
"Settings" then "Stop navigation".
Torestorethenavigationinformationpresson
"Settings" then "Resume navigation".
Press on Navigationtodisplaytheprimary
pagethengotothesecondarypage.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
05
263
Towards a recent destination
Towards a contact
Navigationtowardsacontactimportedfromatelephoneisonly
possibleiftheaddressenterediscompatiblewiththesystem.
Select "Enter destination".
Selectanaddressfromthelistoffered.
Select "Enter destination".
Select "Contacts".
Selectadestinationfromthecontactsinthelist
offered.
Select "Navigate to".
Select the criteria then "Conrm" to start
guidance.
Select "Navigate to".
Select the criteria then "Conrm" or press
"Show route on map"tostartguidance.
Press on Navigationtodisplaytheprimary
pagethengotothesecondarypage.
Press on Navigationtodisplaytheprimary
pagethengotothesecondarypage.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
05
Towards GPS coordinates
Towards a point on the map
Select "Enter destination".
Select "Address".
Enterthe"Longitude:" then the "Latitude:".
Select "Navigate to".
Select the criteria then "Conrm" or press
"Show route on map"tostartguidance.
Select "Enter destination".
Select "From map".
Zoominonthemapthenselectthepoint.
Press on Navigationtodisplaytheprimary
pagethengotothesecondarypage.
Press on Navigationtodisplaytheprimary
pagethengotothesecondarypage.
Alongpressdisplaysthesurroundingtouristattractions.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
264
05
265
Towards points of interest (POI)
PointsofInterest(POI)showallofthelocationsofservicesnearby(hotels,
retailoutlet,airports,...).
Select "Search for POI".
Select "All POIs" or "Garage" or "Dining/
hotels" or "Personal" or "By name".
Selectacategoryfromthelistoffered.
Select "Search".
Selectapointofinterestfromthelistoffered.
Select "Navigate to".
Press on Navigationtodisplaytheprimary
pagethengotothesecondarypage.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Anannualmappingupdateallowsnewpointsofinteresttobe
presentedtoyou.
YoucanalsoupdatetheRiskareas/Dangerareaseverymonth.
Thedetailedprocedureisavailableon:
http://citroen.navigation.com.
05
266
Press on Navigationtodisplaytheprimary
pagethengotothesecondarypage.
Selectacategoryfromthelistofferedthen
"Conrm".
Select "Show POIs".
Towards points of interest (POI)
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
267
05
267
ThesefunctionsareonlyavailableifRiskAreashavebeen
downloadedandinstalledonthesystem.
Select "Settings".
Select "Alert cong.".
Risk area / Danger zone alert settings
ItisthenpossibletoactivateRiskAreasalertsthen:
- "Audiblewarning"
- "Alertonlywhennavigating"
- "Alertonlyforoverspeed"
- "Displayspeedlimits"
- Timing:thechoiceoftimingallowsthetimebeforegivinga
RiskAreaalerttobedened.
Select "Conrm".
Press on Navigationtodisplaytheprimary
pagethengotothesecondarypage.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
05
268
Adding a waypoint Organising waypoints
Select "Enter destination".
Select "Itinerary".
Select "Add waypoint" then "Address".
Theaddressofthewaypointisenteredin
thesamewayasadestination,soenter
the "City:"orpostcode,the"Road:"and
the "N°:".Conrmeachtime.
Then select "Add waypoint".
Selectthewaypointthatyouwanttomovein
theorder.
Toorganisewaypoints,carryoutthepreviousoperations1to
3again(Addingawaypoint).
Select "Up".
Select "Down".
Select "Delete".
Select "Road map"toviewthechangesmade
totheroute.
Select "Navigate to".
Select the criteria then "Conrm" to start
guidanceandgivethegeneraldirectionofthe
navigationroute.
Press on Navigationtodisplaytheprimary
pagethengotothesecondarypage.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
05
269
Route options
Calculation criteria
Select "Settings".
Select "Criteria".
Itisthenpossibletochoose:
- thenavigationcriteria:"Fastest", "Shortest", "Time/distance",
"Ecological".
- theexclusioncriteria:"Include tollroads", "Include ferries",
"Trafc", "Strict", "Close".
Select "Conrm".
Press Navigationtodisplaytheprimarypage
thengotothesecondarypage.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Theecologicalcalculationisbasedonmappingdatabutthismay
notalwaysbecorrect.
05
270
Traffic information
Select "Trafc messages".
Press on Navigationtodisplaytheprimary
pagethengotothesecondarypage.
Selectthemessagefromthelistoffered.
Selectthemagnifyingglassestohavethe
informationspoken.
Set the "On the route", "Around", "Near
destination"lterstone-tunethelist.
Pressagaintoremovethelter.
Select "Settings".
Select:
- "Warn of new messages",
- "Speak messages".
Thenenterthelterradius.
Press on Navigationtodisplaytheprimary
pagethengotothesecondarypage.
Display of messages
Setting lters
Werecommendalterradiusof:
- 12miles(20km)inurbanareas,
- 30miles(50km)onmotorways.
TMC(TrafcMessageChannel)messagesonGPS-Navigation
containtrafcinformationtransmittedinrealtime.
Select "Conrm".
TRAFFIC
Select "Info option".
05
271
Redandyellowtriangle:trafcinformation,forexample:
Modiedsigns
Riskofexplosion
Narrowcarriageway
Roadclosed
Slippery surface
Demonstration
Accident
Danger
Delay
No entry
Roadworks
Trafcjam
Main trafc symbols
Blackandbluetriangle:generalinformation,forexample:
Weather reports Trafcreports
Wind Fog
Parking Snow/ice
Receiving TA messages
TRAFFIC
Select "Settings".
Press on Navigationtodisplaytheprimary
pagethengotothesecondarypage.
Select "Voice".
Activate/Deactivate"Trafc (TA)".
TheTA(TrafcAnnouncement)functiongivesprioritytoTAalert
messages.Tooperate,thisfunctionneedsgoodreceptionofaradio
stationtransmittingthistypeofmessage.Whenatrafcreportis
transmitted,thecurrentaudiosource(Radio,USB,...)isinterrupted
automaticallytoplaytheTAmessage.Normalplaybackoftheaudio
sourceresumesattheendofthetransmissionofthemessage.
05
Diverting from a route
Press on Navigationtodisplaytheprimary
pagethengotothesecondarypage.
Select "Trafc messages".
Select "Diversion".
Selectthediversiondistancebypressing+ or -.
Select "Recalculate route".Theroute
willbemodiedintimeanddistance.
Select "Conrm".
Theroutemaybedivertedfollowingthereceptionofatrafc
informationmessage.
TRAFFIC
272
05
273
Map settings
MAP
Map orientation
Select "Map settings".
Select "Orientation".
Select:
- "Flat view north heading"tokeepthemap
always North up,
- "Flat view vehicle heading" to have the
mapfollowthedirectionoftravel,
- "Perspective view"todisplaya
perspectiveview.
Press on Navigationtodisplaytheprimary
pagethengotothesecondarypage.
Select "Conrm"tosavethemodications.
05
Streetnamesarevisibleonthemapfromthe100mscale.
Congure
Select "Aspect".
Select:
- ""Day" map colour"tohavethemap
alwaysindaymode.
- ""Night" map colour"tohavethemap
alwaysinnightmode.
- "Automatic day/night" to have
thebrightnessofthemapadjusted
automaticallyaccordingtotheambientlight
level.
Thismodemakesuseofthevehicle's
sunshinesensororbymanualoperationof
thevehicle'slighting.
Select "Map settings".
Press on Navigationtodisplaytheprimary
pagethengotothesecondarypage.
MAP
Then "Conrm"tosavethemodications.
274
05
275
Navigation speech synthesis
Volume / Street names
Select "Settings".
Select "Voice".
Select "Conrm"tosavethemodications.
Press on Navigationtodisplaytheprimary
pagethengotothesecondarypage.
SETTINGS
Select "Voice synthesis"and/or"Male voice"
and/or"Female voice"and/or"Speak road
names".
06
276
CONFIGURATION
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
"Configuration"
Primary page
Audio settings
Audio settings
Audio settings
277277
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Conguration
Audio settings
Ambience
Choosethesoundambience.
Balance
Setthepositionofthesoundinthevehicleusingthe
Arkamys
®
system.
Sound effects
Setthevolumeoractivatethelinktovehiclespeed.
Ringtones
Setthetelephoneringtoneandvolume.
Voice
Setthevolumeandvoiceforspeakingstreetnames.
Conrm
Savethesettings.
Conguration
Turn off screen
Turnoffthedisplay(blackscreen).Apressontheblack
screenrestoresthedisplay.
Conguration
Interactive help
Back
ConsulttheInteractivehelp.
Driving assistance -
Equipment
Warning lamps
Audio communication
GPS Navigation
Previous page
Next page
06
278
CONFIGURATION
Level 1 Level 2
Units
Display screen
Conguration
Adjust date and time
"Configuration"
Secondary page
Factory settings
279
Level 1 Level 2 Comments
Conguration
Secondary page
System Settings
Units
Settheunitsusedtodisplaydistance,fuelconsumptionand
temperature.
Delete data
SelectthedesireddatainthelistthenpressDelete.
Factory settings
Returntofactorysettings.
Conrm
Savethesettings.
Conguration
Secondary page
Time/Date
Conrm
Setthedateandtimethenconrm.
Conguration
Secondary page
Screen settings
Automatic text scrolling
Makethesettingthenconrm.
Deactivate animations
Conrm
06
CONFIGURATION
Level 1 Level 2
Choice of language
Calculator
"Configuration"
Secondary page
Conguration
Calendar
280
281
Level 1 Level 2 Comments
Conguration
Secondary page
Languages
Conrm
Selectthelanguagethenconrm.
Conguration
Secondary page
Calculator
Selectthecalculator.
Conguration
Secondary page
Calendar
Selectthecalendar.
06
282
CONFIGURATION
- "Ambience"(choiceof6musicalambiences)
- "Bass"
- "Treble"
- "Loudness"(Activate/Deactivate)
- "Balance"("Driver", "All passengers", "Front only")
- "Audio setting on touch screen"
- "Volume linked to vehicle speed:"(Activate/Deactivate)
Theaudiosettings(Ambience, Bass, TrebleandLoudness)are
differentandindependentforeachsoundsource.
Thesettingsfordistributionandbalancearecommontoallsources.
Thedistribution(orspatialisationusingtheArkamys
©
system)
ofsoundisanaudioprocessthatallowstheaudioqualitytobe
adaptedtothenumberoflistenersinthevehicle.
Availableonlywiththe6-speakerconguration.
On-boardaudio:Arkamys
©
SoundStaging.
WithSoundStaging,thedriverandpassengersareimmersedinan
"audioscene"recreatingthenaturalatmosphereofanauditorium:
trulyapartofthesceneanditssurroundings.
Thisnewsensationismadepossiblebysoftwareintheaudio
systemwhichprocessesthedigitalsignalsfromthemediaplayers
(radio,MP3…)withoutchangingtheaudiosettings.Thisprocessing
takesaccountofthecharacteristicsofthepassengercompartment
toproduceoptimumresults.
TheArkamys
©
softwareinstalledinyouraudiosystemprocesses
thedigitalsignalfromthemediaplayers(radio,MP3,...)and
recreatesanaturalmusicalscene,withharmoniousplacementof
instrumentsandvoicesinthespaceinfrontofpassengers,levelwith
thewindscreen.
Audio settings
Select "Audio settings".
Press on Congurationtodisplaytheprimary
page.
Select "Ambience" or "Balance" or "Sound
effects" or "Ringtones" or "Voice".
06
283
CONFIGURATION
Select "Interactive help".
Press on Congurationtodisplaytheprimary
page.
Theinteractiveversionofyourhandbookavailableinthistouch
screenisnotintendedasasubstituteforthemorecompletecontent
oftheprinteddocument.
Interactive help
Forsafetyreasons,consultationofyourhandbookisonlypossible
withthevehiclestationary.
06
Modify system settings
System
Select "System Settings".
Press on Congurationtodisplaytheprimary
pagethengotothesecondarypage.
Select "Units"tochangetheunitsofdistance,
fuelconsumptionandtemperature.
Select "Factory settings" to return to the
originalsettings.
Select "Delete data"todeletethelistofrecent
destinations,personalpointsofinterest,
contactsinthelist.
Choosetheitemthenselect"Delete".
CONFIGURATION
Select "Screen settings".
Press on Congurationtodisplaytheprimary
pagethengotothesecondarypage.
Activateordeactivate"Activate automatic text
scrolling"and"Activate animations".
284
06
285
Select:
- "Time/Date"tochangethetimezone,
synchronisationwithGPS,timeandits
formatandthenthedate.
- "Languages"tochangethelanguage.
- "Calculator"todisplayacalculator
- "Calendar"todisplayacalendar.
Press on Congurationtodisplaytheprimary
pagethengotothesecondarypage.
CONFIGURATION
07
286
CONNECTED SERVICES
286
Level 1
Level 2
"Connected services"
Primary page
Drivingassistance
applications,seefollowing
pageon"CITROËN
MULTICITYCONNECT"*.
Identication
DUN connection settings
Transfer rate
Itmaybethatcertainnew
generationsmartphones
arenotcompatiblewiththis
standard.
Secondary page
Internetnavigationvia
BluetoothtelephoneDial-Up
Networking(DUN).
*Dependingoncountry.
07
287
CITROËN MULTICITY CONNECT
These applications use vehicle
datasuchasthecurrentspeed,
mileage,remainingfuelrange
orevenGPSpositiontoprovide
pertinentinformation.
Plugthe"CITROËNMULTICITYCONNECT"connectionkeyinto
oneoftheUSBports.
Forthebestreception,itisrecommendedtoconnectthe"CITROËN
MULTICITYCONNECT"keytotheUSBportlocatedintheglove
box(availableaccordingtoequipment).
The "MyCITROËN" application
isalinkbetweentheuser,the
manufactureranditsdealer
network.
Itallowsthecustomertoknow
everythingabouttheirvehicle:
servicingplan,accessoryrange,
servicecontractstakenout,...
Italsomakespossiblethesending
ofthevehicle'smileagetothe
"MyCITROËN"site,ortoidentify
adealer.
"CITROËNMULTICITYCONNECT"isaserviceprovidingdrivingaidapplicationsinrealtime,thatgivesaccesstousefulinformationsuchas
thestateofthetrafc,dangerzones,fuelprices,theavailabilityofparkingplaces,touristsites,weatherconditions,correctaddresses…
Itincludesaccesstothemobilenetworkassociatedwiththeuseoftheseapplications."CITROËNMULTICITYCONNECT"isaservice
availableundersubscriptioncontractfromCITROËNdealers,dependingoncountryandthetypeoftouchscreen,bothbeforeandafter
deliveryofanewvehicle.
Forsafetyreasons,somefunctionscanonlybeusedwhen
stationary.
Pressthe"Connectedservices"menutodisplaytheapplications.
287
08
288
TELEPHONE
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Contacts
Call log
"Telephone"
Primary page
289
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Telephone
Call log
All calls
Aftermakingchoices,startthecall.
Incoming calls
Outgoing calls
Contacts
Magnifying glass
View
Create
Call
Telephone
Contacts
Addresses
Aftermakingchoices,startthecall.
View
New
Import
Delete
Delete all
Search for contact
Conrm
Navigate to
Search for contact
Call
08
290
TELEPHONE
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Bluetooth (equipment)
Telephone Options
Devices detected
Telephone connection
"Telephone"
Secondary page
291
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Telephone
connection
Secondary page
Bluetooth
Connection
Search
Startthesearchforanotherperipheraldevicetoconnect.
Disconnect
StoptheBluetoothconnectiontotheselectedperipheral
device.
Update
Importthecontactsfromtheselectedtelephonetostore
themintheaudiosystem.
Delete
Deletetheselectedtelephone.
Conrm
Savethesettings.
Telephone
connection
Secondary page
Search for
devices
Devices detected
Telephone
Startthesearchforperipheraldevices.
Audiostreaming
Internet
Telephone
connection
Secondary page
Telephone
Options
Put on hold
Cutthemicrophonetemporarilysothatthecontactcannot
hearyourconversationwithapassenger.
Update
Importthecontactsfromtheselectedtelephonetosavethen
intheaudiosystem.
Ringtones
Choosethetelephoneringtoneandvolume.
Memory info.
Contactrecordsusedandfree,percentageofstoragespace
usedbyinternalcontactsandBluetoothcontacts.
Conrm
Savethesettings.
08
292
Pairing a Bluetooth telephone
First connection
Forreasonsofsafetyandbecausetheyrequireprolongedattention
onthepartofthedriver,theoperationsforpairingtheBluetooth
mobiletelephonetothehands-freesystemoftheaudiosystemmust
becarriedoutwiththevehicle stationary.
Select "Bluetooth Connection".
Press on Telephonetodisplaytheprimary
pagethengotothesecondarypage.
Select Search.
Thelistoftelephonesdetectedisdisplayed.
Activatethetelephone'sBluetoothfunction
andensurethatitis"visibletoall"(telephone
conguration).
Procedure (short) from the telephone
IntheBluetoothmenuofyourdevice,selectthe
systemnameinthelistofdevicesdetected.
Enteracodeofatleast4guresinthedevice
andconrm.
Enterthissamecodeinthesystem,select"OK"
andconrm.
Procedure from the system
Thesystemofferstoconnectthetelephone:
- in"Telephone"(hands-freekit,telephoneonly),
- in"Audio streaming"(streaming:wirelessplayingofaudioles
fromthetelephone),
- in"Internet"(internetbrowsing,onlyifyourtelephoneis
compatiblewiththe"DUN"Dial-UpNetworkingBluetooth
standard).
SelectoneormoreprolesandConrm.
Selectthenameofthedesiredperipheralfrom
thelistandConrm.
BLUETOOTH
Ifthetelephoneisnotdetected,itisrecommendedthatyouswitch
theBluetoothfunctiononyourtelephoneoffandthenonagain.
Enteracodeofatleast4guresforthe
connection then "Conrm".
Enterthissamecodeinthetelephonethen
accepttheconnection.
08
293
Dependingonyourtelephone,youmaybeaskedtoaccept
automaticconnectioneverytimetheignitionisswitchedon.
Dependingonthetypeoftelephone,thesystem
willaskyoutoacceptornotthetransferofyour
contacts.
Theservicesavailabledependonthenetwork,theSIMcardandthe
compatibilityoftheBluetoothtelephoneused.Checkthetelephone
manualandwithyournetworkproviderfordetailsoftheservices
availabletoyou.
Onreturntothevehicle,thelasttelephoneconnectedautomatically
reconnects,withinaround30secondsafterswitchingontheignition
(Bluetoothactivated).
Tomodifytheautomaticconnectionmode,selectthetelephonein
thelistthenselectthedesiredprole.
Thetelephoneisaddedtothelist.
BLUETOOTH
If not, select "Update".
Theabilityofthesystemtoconnectwithonlyoneproledependson
thetelephone.Thetwoprolesmaybothconnectbydefault.
Visitwww.citroen.co.ukformoreinformation(compatibility,
additionalhelp,...).
Automatic reconnection
Connecting a Bluetooth peripheral
Onswitchingontheignition,thetelephoneconnectedwhenthe
ignitionwaslastswitchedoffisautomaticallyreconnected,ifthis
connectionmodehadbeenactivatedduringthepairingprocedure.
Theconnectionisconrmedbythedisplayofa
messageandthenameofthetelephone.
Press on Telephonetodisplaytheprimary
pagethengotothesecondarypage.
Manual connection
Select "Bluetooth"todisplaythelistofpaired
peripherals.
Selecttheperipheraltoconnect.
Press on "Search".
Theconnectionisconrmedbythedisplayofa
messageandthenameofthetelephone.
08
Receiving a call
Anincomingcallisannouncedbyaringandasuperimposeddisplay
inthescreen.
Makeashortpressonthesteeringmounted
TELbuttontoacceptanincomingcall.
Makealongpressonthesteeringmounted
TELbuttontorejectthecall.
or
Select "End call".
Managing paired telephones
Press on Telephonetodisplaytheprimary
pagethengotothesecondarypage.
Select "Bluetooth"todisplaythelistofpaired
peripheraldevices.
Selecttheperipheralinthelist.
Select:
- "Search" or "Disconnect" to connect or
disconnecttheBluetoothconnectionwith
theperipheralselected.
- "Delete"toremovethepairing.
BLUETOOTH
294
Thisfunctionallowstheconnectionordisconnectionofaperipheral
deviceaswellasthedeletionofapairing.
08
295
Press on Telephonetodisplaytheprimary
page.
Calling a new number
Calling a contact
Making a call
Useofthetelephoneisnotrecommendedwhiledriving.
Werecommendedthatyouparksafelyormakeuseofthe
steeringmountedcontrols.
Enterthephonenumberusingthekeypadthen
"Call"tostartthecall.
Press on Telephonetodisplaytheprimary
page.
Select "Contacts".
Selectthedesiredcontactfromthelistoffered.
Select "Call".
CONTACTS
Ormakealongpressonthesteering
mountedTELbutton.
08
296
Calling a recently used number
Ending a call
Itisalwayspossibletomakeacalldirectlyfromthetelephone;park
thevehiclerstasasafetymeasure.
Select "Call log".
Press on Telephonetodisplaytheprimary
page.
Selectthedesiredcontactfromthelistoffered.
Select "End call".
CALL LOG
or
Makealongpressonthesteeringmounted
TELbutton.
08
297
Ringtones
Select "Telephone Options".
Press on Telephonetodisplaytheprimary
pagethengotothesecondarypage.
Select "Ringtones".
Youcanselecttheringtoneusedandadjustitsvolume.
Select "Contacts".
Press on Telephonetodisplaytheprimary
page.
Select "Add contact".
Select:
- "New"toaddanewcontact.
- "Modify"toedittheselectedcontact.
- "Delete"todeletetheselectedcontact.
- "Delete all"todeletealloftheinformation
fortheselectedcontact.
Select "Conrm".
Select "Directory information"forthenumber
ofentriesused,available,...
Managing contacts / Entries
SETTINGS
Thefollowingtablegroupstogethertheanswerstothemostfrequentlyaskedquestionsconcerningyouraudiosystem.
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
298
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
Navigation, guidance
The route calculation is
notsuccessful.
Theguidancecriteriamayconictwiththecurrentlocation(exclusionof
tollroadsonatollmotorway).
ChecktheguidancecriteriaontheNavigation
Menu,"Guidanceoptions"\"Denecalculation
criteria".
Iamunabletoentermy
postcode.
Thesystemonlyacceptspostcodesofupto5characters.
ThePOIsdonotappear. ThePOIshavenotbeenselected. SelectthePOIsinthelistofPOIs.
Theriskareasaudible
warningdoesnotwork.
Theaudiblewarningisnotactive. ActivateaudiblewarningsintheGuidanceoptions
menu,"Navigation-guidance","Setparameters
forriskareas".
Thesystemdoesnot
suggestadetouraround
anincidentontheroute.
TheguidancecriteriadonottakeaccountofTMCmessages. Selectthe"Trafcinfo"functioninthelistof
guidancecriteria.
IreceiveaRiskareaalert
whichisnotonmyroute.
Otherthanguidance,thesystemannouncesallRiskareaspositionedina
conelocatedinfrontofthevehicle.ItmayprovideanalertforaRiskarea
locatedonnearbyorparallelroads.
Zoominonthemaptoviewtheexactpositionof
theRiskarea.Select"Ontheroute"tonolonger
receivealertsotherthanguidanceortoreducethe
timefortheannouncement.
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
299
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
Certaintrafcjams
alongtheroutearenot
indicatedinrealtime.
Onstarting,itisseveralminutesbeforethesystembeginstoreceivethe
trafcinformation.
Waituntilthetrafcinformationisbeingreceived
correctly(displayofthetrafcinformationiconson
themap).
Theltersaretoorestrictive. Modifythe"Geographiclter"settings.
Incertaincountries,onlymajorroutes(motorways...)arelistedforthe
trafcinformation.
Thisphenomenonisnormal.Thesystemis
dependentonthetrafcinformationavailable.
Thealtitudeisnot
displayed.
Onstarting,theinitialisationoftheGPSmaytakeupto3minutesto
receivemorethan4satellitescorrectly.
Waituntilthesystemhasstartedupcompletely.
CheckthatthereisaGPScoverageofatleast
4satellites(longpressontheSETUPbutton,then
select"GPScoverage").
Dependingonthegeographicalenvironment(tunnel...)ortheweather,
theconditionsofreceptionoftheGPSsignalmayvary.
Thisphenomenonisnormal.Thesystem
isdependentontheGPSsignalreception
conditions.
Telephone, Bluetooth
Icannotconnectmy
Bluetoothtelephone.
Thetelephone'sBluetoothfunctionmaybeswitchedofforthetelephone
maynotbevisible.
- Checkthatyourtelephone'sBluetooth
functionisswitchedon.
- Checkinthetelephonesettingsthatitis
"visibletoall".
TheBluetoothtelephoneisnotcompatiblewiththesystem. Youcancheckthecompatibilityofyourtelephone
atwww.citroen.co.uk(services).
Thevolumeofthe
telephoneconnected
inBluetoothmodeis
inaudible.
Thevolumedependsbothonthesystemandonthetelephone. Increasethevolumeoftheaudiosystem,to
maximumifrequired,andincreasethevolumeof
thetelephoneifnecessary.
Theambientnoiselevelhasaninuenceonthequalityoftelephone
communication.
Reducetheambientnoiselevel(closethewindows,
reducetheboosterfanspeed,slowdown,...).
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
300
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
Somecontactsare
duplicatedinthelist.
Theoptionsforsynchronizingcontactsaresynchronizingthecontacts
ontheSIMcard,thecontactsonthetelephone,orboth.Whenboth
synchronizationsareselected,somecontactsmaybeduplicated.
Select"DisplaySIMcardcontacts"or"Display
telephonecontacts".
Contacts are not shown
inalphabeticalorder.
Sometelephonesofferdisplayoptions.Dependingonthesettings
chosen,contactscanbetransferredinaspecicorder.
Modifythedisplaysettinginthetelephone
directory.
Thesystemdoesnot
receiveSMStextmessages.
TheBluetoothmodedoesnotpermitsendingSMStextmessagestothe
system.
MP3
Thereisalongwaiting
periodfollowingthe
connection of a USB
memorystick.
Whenconnectingnewmedia,thesystemreadsacertainamountofdata
(directory,title,artist,etc.).Thismaytakefromafewsecondstoa
fewminutes.
Thisphenomenonisnormal.
Somecharactersinthe
mediainformationarenot
displayedcorrectlywhile
playing.
Theaudiosystemdoesnotdisplaysometypesofcharacters. Usestandardcharacterstonametracksand
folders.
Playingofstreamingles
doesnotstart.
Theperipheraldeviceconnecteddoesnotsupportautomaticplay. Starttheplaybackfromthedevice.
Thenamesoftracksand
thetracklengtharenot
displayedonthescreen
whenstreamingaudio.
TheBluetoothproledoesnotallowthetransferofthisinformation.
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
301
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
Radio
Thequalityofreception
oftheradiostation
listenedtogradually
deterioratesorthestored
stationsdonotfunction
(nosound,87.5Mhzis
displayed...).
Thevehicleistoofarfromthetransmitterusedbythestationlistened
toorthereisnotransmitterinthegeographicalareathroughwhichthe
vehicleistravelling.
Activatethe"RDS"functionbymeansofthe
short-cutmenutoenablethesystemtocheck
whetherthereisamorepowerfultransmitterinthe
geographicalarea.
Theenvironment(hills,buildings,tunnels,basementcarparks...)block
reception,includinginRDSmode.
Thisphenomenonisnormalanddoesnotindicate
afaultwiththeaudiosystem.
Theaerialisabsentorhasbeendamaged(forexamplewhengoing
throughacarwashorintoanundergroundcarpark).
HavetheaerialcheckedbyaCITROËNdealer.
Icannotndsomeradio
stations in the list of
stationsreceived.
Thestationisnotreceivedoritsnamehaschangedinthelist.
Someradiostationssendotherinformationinplaceoftheirname
(thetitleofthesongforexample).
Thesysteminterpretsthisinformationasthenameofthestation.
Thenameoftheradio
stationchanges.
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
302
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
Settings, conguration
Inchangingthesetting
oftrebleandbassthe
equalizersettingis
deselected.
Theselectionofanequalizersettingimposesthebalancesettings.
Modifyingonewithouttheotherisnotpossible.
Modifythebalanceorequalizersettingstoobtain
thedesiredmusicalambience.
Inchangingtheequalizer
setting,trebleandbass
returntozero.
Whenchangingthe
balancesettings,the
distributionsettingis
deselected.
Theselectionofadistributionsettingimposesthebalancesettings.
Modifyingonewithouttheotherisnotpossible.
Modifythebalanceordistributionsettingsto
obtainthedesiredmusicalambience.
Whenchangingan
distributionsetting,
thebalancesettingis
deselected.
Thereisadifferencein
soundqualitybetween
thedifferentaudio
sources(radio,USB...).
Foroptimumsoundquality,theaudiosettingsforVolume,Bass,Treble,
EqualizerandLoudnesscanbeadaptedtothedifferentsoundsources,
whichmayresultinaudibledifferenceswhenchangingsource(radio,
USB...).
Checkthattheaudiosettingsfor(Volume,Bass,
Treble,Equalizer,Loudness)areadaptedto
thesourceslistenedto.Itisadvisabletosetthe
AUDIOfunctions(Bass,Treble,Fr-Rebalance,
Le-Ribalance)tothemiddleposition,selectthe
"None",musicalambienceandsettheloudness
correctiontothe"Active"positioninUSBmodeor
tothe"Inactive"positioninradiomode.
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
303
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
Withtheengineoff,the
systemswitchesoffafter
afewminutesofuse.
Whentheengineisswitchedoff,thesystem'soperatingtimedependson
thebatterycharge.
Theswitch-offisnormal:thesystemswitchestoeconomymodeand
switchesofftopreventdischargingofthevehicle'sbattery.
Startthevehicle'senginetoincreasethebattery
charge.
USB, portable player, connection key
PlaybackofmyUSB
memorystickstartsonly
afteraverylongwait
(around2to3minutes).
Somelessuppliedwiththememorystickmaygreatlyslowdownaccess
toreadingthememorystick(multiplicationby10ofthecataloguetime).
Deletethelessuppliedwiththememorystick
andlimitthenumberofsub-foldersinthele
structureonthememorystick.
WhenIconnectmy
iPhoneastelephoneand
to the USB port at the
sametime,Iamunable
toplaythemusicles.
WhentheiPhoneconnectsautomaticallyasatelephone,itforcesthe
streamingfunction.ThestreamingfunctiontakestheplaceoftheUSB
functionwhichisthennotuseable,thereisaperiodwithoutsoundofthe
trackbeingplayedwithApple
®
players.
DisconnectandreconnecttotheUSBport
(theUSBfunctiontakespriorityoverstreaming).
304
305
.
Alphabetical index
C4-cactus_gb_Chap13_index-alpha_ed02-2014
Accessories..................................................212
Accessorysocket,12V..............................69-71
AdBlue
®
........................................... 19,161,165
Adjustingheadlamps.................................... 115
Adjustingheadrestraints................................50
Adjustingthesteeringwheel..........................56
Adviceoncare
andmaintenance........................121,214,224
Adviceondriving............................................78
Airbags........................................15,16,21,135
Airbags,curtain.....................................139,140
Airbags,front.........................................136,140
Airbags,lateral......................................138,140
Airbagwarninglamp...........................15,16,21
AIRBUMP
®
............................................ 211,214
Airconditioning,automatic.......................58,63
Airconditioning,manual...........................58,61
Airdistributionadjustment..................60,62,65
Air filter..........................................................223
Airflowadjustment.............................59,61,65
Airintake............................................ 60,62,66
Air recirculation.................................. 60,62,66
Air vents..........................................................57
Anti-theft...................................................40,42
Armrest,front......................................69,70,73
Assistance call..............................125,231,232
Audiblewarning............................................125
Audiocable...................................................254
Audiostreaming
(Bluetooth)..........................................250,253
Automaticillumination
ofheadlamps...................................... 109,112
Automaticoperation
ofhazardwarninglamps............................124
Automaticrainsensitive
windscreenwipers...............................117,119
Auxiliarysocket.............................. 72,250,254
A
C
Capacity,fueltank........................................156
CD.................................................................250
CDMP3.........................................................250
Centrallocking..........................................40,44
Changingabulb.................................... 183-190
Changingafuse.....................................191-197
Changingawheel..................................176-181
Changingawiperblade........................120,203
Changingthedate...........................................38
Changingtheremotecontrol
battery...........................................................42
Changingthetime...........................................38
Checkinglevels..................................... 219-222
Checkingtheengineoillevel.................. 27,219
Checkingtyrepressures
(usingthekit)..............................................175
Checks...................................................217-224
Baghook.........................................................76
Battery...........................................198-202,223
Battery,charging...........................................201
Battery,remotecontrol............................. 41,42
Blackscreen.................................................123
BlueHDi.............................................24,84,161
Bluetooth(hands-free)......................... 292,293
Bluetooth(telephone)........................... 292,293
Bonnet...........................................................216
Bonnet stay...................................................216
Boot................................................... 47,75,123
Bootlamp..............................................123,190
Brakediscs....................................................224
Brakelamps..................................................188
Brakepads....................................................224
Brakingsystemwarninglamp.........................18
B
Children..................................134,136,141-155
Childseats............................................ 141-154
Childseats,conventional.............................. 147
Childseats,i-Size.........................................153
Childseats,ISOFIX...................................... 151
CITROËNLocalisedAssistanceCall...........232
CITROËN LocalisedEmergencyCall...........232
CITROËNMULTICITYCONNECT...............287
Cleaning(advice)..........................................214
Closingtheboot..............................................47
Closingthedoors............................................45
Coathook........................................................73
Coldclimatescreen......................................210
Colour screen................................. 29,234,235
Connectors,audio.......................... 72,250,254
Coolant level.................................................221
Corneringlamps........................................... 116
Cruise control............................................96,99
Cupholder.................................................69,70
D
DAB(DigitalAudioBroadcasting)........248,249
Date(setting)...................................................38
Daytimerunninglamps................. 109,113,184
DeactivatingESP..........................................131
Deactivatingthepassengerairbag...............136
Deadlocking..............................................41,44
Demisting/Defrosting,front.............................67
Demisting/Defrosting,rear..............................68
Dieseladditivelevel......................................222
Dieselenginepre-heatwarninglamp............14
DigitalAudioBroadcasting(DAB)........248,249
Dimensions...................................................229
Dippedbeam.........................................108,184
Dipstick..........................................................219
306
Alphabetical index
C4-cactus_gb_Chap13_index-alpha_ed02-2014
Identificationplates.......................................230
Ignition.......................................................66,81
Indicators,direction......................124,185,188
Inflatingaccessories
(usingthekit)..............................................175
Inflatingtyres............................................9,230
Instrumentpanel............................................. 11
Interactive help................................................28
Interiorfittings............................................69-71
Interiorlamp..........................................122,190
ISOFIXmountings.........................................150
Heightadjustment,
steeringwheel..............................................56
Hill start assist.................................................89
Jack............................................................... 176
Jackcable.....................................................254
JACKsocket................................... 72,250,254
Jukebox(playing)..........................................255
Gearbox,
electronic... 9,23,70,73,85,89,90,201,224
Gearbox,manual....... 9,69,73,83,89,90,224
Gearshiftindicator.........................................84
Gearselector,electronicgearbox..................85
Gearlever,manualgearbox...........................83
Glovebox...................................................69-71
Hands-freekit...................................... 292,293
Hazardwarninglamps............................ 77,124
Headrestraints,front......................................51
Headrestraints,rear.......................................53
Heating................................................59,61,63
J
K
Economicaldriving..........................................9
Economymode.............................................202
Electricwindowcontrols.................................48
Electronicengineimmobiliser...................40,44
Electronicstabilitycontrol(ESC)..................129
Emergencybootrelease.................................47
Emergencycall.............................125,231,232
Emergencywarninglamps..................... 77,124
Emissionscontrolsystem,SCR.............20,161
Energyeconomymode.................................202
Enginecompartment............................ 217,218
Enginecompartmentfusebox.......................196
Engine,Diesel.........14,159,160,218,227,228
Engineoil......................................................219
Engineoillevelindicator......................... 27,219
Engine,petrol........................159,217,225,226
Environment......... 9,58,68,126,168,201,222
Equipmentsettings............................ 28,30,33
ESC/ASR.......................................................129
Fillingwithfuel..............................156,158,159
Fittingawheel...............................................180
Fittingroofbars.............................................208
F
H
I
G
Directionindicators.......114,124,183,185,188
Doors...............................................................45
Driver'sseatbeltnotfastenedwarninglamp.....133
Dynamicstabilitycontrol(DSC)........ 16,18,131
Fittings,boot...................................................75
Flashingindicators................ 114,124,185,188
Foglamps,front..................... 110,116,183,185
Foglamps,rear...................................... 110,188
Frequency(radio)..................................245,247
Front seats......................................................50
Fuel............................................................9,159
Fuelconsumption..............................................9
Fuel filler cap.................................................156
Fuel filler flap.........................................156,158
Fuelgauge.............................................. 11,156
Fueltank................................................156,158
Fuses......................................................191-197
E
Keepingchildrensafe............134,136,141-155
Keyinignitionwarning....................................81
Keywithremotecontrol............................39-43
307
.
Alphabetical index
C4-cactus_gb_Chap13_index-alpha_ed02-2014
M
N
L
Labels,identification.....................................230
Lamps,front..........................................183,214
Lamps,rear...........................................188,214
Lamps,warningandindicator.................. 13-23
Leather(care)................................................214
LEDdaytimerunninglamps....109,113,183,184
Level,AdBlue
®
additive.................................161
Level,brakefluid...........................................221
Levelsandchecks.................................217-224
Light-emittingdiodes-LEDs................113,190
Lightingbulbs
(replacement)...................................... 183-190
Lightingcontrolstalk..................... 108,109,114
Lightingdimmer............................................123
Lighting,guide-mehome.............................. 114
Lighting,interior............................................122
Loading.............................................................9
Loadreductionmode....................................202
Locatingyourvehicle......................................40
Lockingfromtheinside...................................44
Lockingthedoors.............................. 40,44,46
Low fuel level..........................................21,156
Mainbeam....................................108,183,185
Maintenance(advice)........................ 9,211,214
Mapreadinglamps.......................................122
Markings,identification.................................230
Mat......................................................69,70,74
Menus(audio)............. 238,240,242,256,258,
260,276,288,290
Menus(Touchscreentablet)........... 28,29,234
Mirror, rear view..............................................55
Mirrors,door....................................................54
Misfuel prevention.........................................158
MountingsforISOFIXseats.........................150
O
P
Navigation.....................................................255
Numberplatelamps......................................189
Oilchange.....................................................219
Oilconsumption............................................219
Oil filter..........................................................223
Oil level.................................................... 27,219
Openingthebonnet......................................216
Openingtheboot............................................47
Openingthedoors..........................................45
Operationindicatorlamps........................13,16
Paintcolourcode..........................................230
Panoramicglasssunroof..............................121
Parcel shelf, rear.............................................76
ParkAssist....................................................103
Parkingbrake..........................................82,224
Parkinglamps............................................... 114
Parkingsensors,front...................................101
Parkingsensors,rear....................................100
Particle filter......................................... 222,223
Passengercompartmentfilter......................223
R
Radio.............................................................244
RDS...............................................................247
Reardoorwindows.................................48,214
Rearfoglamp......................................... 110,188
Rearscreen(demisting)..................................68
Rechargingthebattery.................................201
Reductionofelectricalload..........................202
Regenerationoftheparticlefilter.................223
Reinitialisingtheremotecontrol.....................42
Remotecontrol.......................................... 39-43
Removablescreen
(snowshield)...............................................210
Removingawheel........................................178
Removingthemat...........................................74
Repairkit,puncture.......................................169
Replacingbulbs.................................... 183-190
Replacingfuses.....................................191-197
Replacingtheairfilter...................................223
Replacingtheoilfilter...................................223
Replacingthepassenger
compartmentfilter......................................223
Replacingwiperblades.........................120,203
Resettingtheservice
indicator........................................................26
Resettingthetriprecorder..............................37
Reversingcamera.........................................102
Plip............................................................39-44
Port, USB........................... 69,70,72,250,254
Preheater, Diesel............................................14
Primingthefuelsystem................................160
Protectingchildren.................134,136,141-155
Protectors...................................................... 211
Puncture........................................................169
308
Alphabetical index
C4-cactus_gb_Chap13_index-alpha_ed02-2014
Reversinglamp.............................................188
Riskareas(update).......................................265
Roof bars.......................................................208
Routinechecks.....................................223,224
Runningoutoffuel(Diesel)..........................160
U
V
Safetyforchildren..................134,136,141-155
Screenmenu............... 238,240,242,256,258,
260,276,288,290
Screenwashfluidlevel..................................222
Screenwash, front......................................... 118
Screenwash reservoir...................................222
SCR(SelectiveCatalytic
Reduction)..................................................161
Seatadjustment..............................................50
Seat belts.......................................132-134,147
Seatbeltswarninglamp...............................133
Seat, rear bench.............................................52
Selector,electronicgearbox..........................85
Serialnumber,vehicle..................................230
Serviceindicator.............................................24
Servicewarninglamp.....................................17
Servicing...........................................................9
Settingtheclock.............................................38
Sidelamps............. 108,113,114,183,184,188
Siderepeater................................................187
Snow chains..................................................182
Spare wheel..........................................176,177
Speedlimiter.............................................93,99
Startingtheengine...................................79,86
Startingusinganotherbattery......................200
Steeringmountedcontrols............................237
Stop & Start..........................36,67,90,92,103,
156,198,216,223
Tableofweights................................... 226,228
Tablesofengines..................................225,227
Tables of fuses.......................................191-197
Tank,AdBlue
®
additive.........................161,166
Tank,fuel.......................................................158
Technicaldata....................................... 225-228
Telephone.....................................................288
Temperatureadjustment...........................59,63
Temporarypuncturerepairkit................76,169
Three flashes function
(directionindicators)...................................124
Thirdbrakelamp...........................................189
TMC(Trafficinfo)..........................................270
Tools..............................................169,176,177
Totaldistancerecorder...................................37
Touch screen tablet................................28,233
Towbar...........................................................206
Towedloads......................................... 226,228
Towinganothervehicle........................ 204,205
Towingeye..............................................76,204
Traction control
(ASR)..............................................16,18,131
Trafficinformation
(TA).............................................................271
Trafficinformation
(TMC)..................................................270,271
S
T
Trailer............................................................206
Tripcomputer............................................35,36
Tripdistancerecorder.....................................37
Tyre pressures..............................................230
Tyres..................................................................9
Tyreunder-inflation
detection.......................................23,126,175
Storage......................................................71,73
Storingaspeed...............................................99
Sun visor....................................................69-71
Switchingofftheengine.................................79
Synchronisingtheremote
control...........................................................42
Synthesiser, voice.........................................275
Systemsettings.............................................284
Underfloorstorage.........................................76
Under-inflation
(detection)...................................................126
Unlockingfromtheinside...............................44
Unlockingtheboot..........................................39
Unlockingthedoors........................... 39,44,46
Updateriskareas..........................................265
Updatingthedate............................................38
Updatingthetime............................................38
UREA....................................................161,162
USB player....................................................250
Vehicleconfiguration......................... 28,30,33
Vehicleidentification.....................................230
Ventilation...............................57,58,59,61,65
Visibility...........................................................67
309
.
Alphabetical index
C4-cactus_gb_Chap13_index-alpha_ed02-2014
W
Warninglamp,lowfuellevel...........................21
Warninglamps.......................................... 13-23
Warninglamp,
SCRemissionscontrolsystem....................20
Warningtriangle........................................76,77
Washing(advice)...................................214,224
Wash-wipe,rear............................................ 118
Weights................................................ 226,228
Windowcontrols.............................................48
Wipercontrolstalk..................................117-119
Wiper, rear.....................................................118
Wipers..............................................15,117,119
C4-cactus_gb_Chap13_index-alpha_ed02-2014
C4-cactus_gb_Chap13_index-alpha_ed02-2014
C4-cactus_gb_Chap13_index-alpha_ed02-2014
C4-cactus_gb_Chap13_index-alpha_ed02-2014
10-14
Labelsarettedinvariousareasofyourvehicle.They
carrysafetywarningsaswellasvehicleidentication
information.Donotremovethem:theyformanintegralpart
ofyourvehicle.
AutomobilesCITROËNdeclares,byapplicationofthe
provisionsoftheEuropeanregulation(Directive2000/53)
relatingtoEndofLifeVehicles,thatitachievesthe
objectivessetbythisregulationandthatrecycledmaterials
areusedinthemanufactureoftheproductsthatitsells.
Reproductionortranslationofallorpartofthisdocument
isprohibitedwithoutwrittenauthorisationfromAutomobiles
CITROËN.
We draw your attention to the following points:
- Thettingofelectricalequipmentoraccessoriesnot
listedbyCITROËNmaycausefaultsandfailures
withtheelectricalsystemofyourvehicle.Contact
aCITROËNdealerforinformationontherangeof
recommendedaccessories.
- Anymodicationoradaptationnotintendedor
authorisedbyAutomobilesCITROËNorcarriedout
withoutmeetingthetechnicalrequirementsdenedby
themanufacturerwouldleadtothesuspensionofthe
newvehiclewarranty.
PrintedintheEU
Anglais
Foranyworkonyourvehicle,useaqualiedworkshopthat
hasthetechnicalinformation,competenceandequipment
required,whichaCITROËNdealerisabletoprovide.
CRÉATIVE TECHNOLOGIE
2014 – DOCUMENTATION DE BORD
4Dconcept
Diadeis
Interak
14C4C.0031
Anglais
52
Comfort
Folding the backrest
Repositioning the seat backrest
) Straighten the seat backrest 2 and secure it.
) Unfasten and return the seat belts to the
sides of the backrest.
) Move the front seats forward if necessary.
) Position the seat belts on the backrest and
buckle them.
) Place the head restraints in the low
position.
) Press both controls 1 simultaneously to
release the seat backrest 2 .
) Fold the seat backrest 2 on to the cushion.
When repositioning the backrest,
ensure that the seat belts are not
trapped and the red indicator, located
next to the controls 1 , is no longer
visible.
Rear seats
Bench seat with fixed one-piece cushion and folding one-piece backrest.
When folding the seat, the centre seat
belt should not be buckled but laid out
flat on the seat.
The rear seat cushion does not fold,
just the seat backrest can be folded to
increase the boot loading space.
112
Safety
Locations for ISOFIX child seats
In accordance with European Regulations, this table indicates the options for installing ISOFIX child seats on seats in the vehicle fitted with ISOFIX
mountings.
In the case of universal and semi-universal ISOFIX child seats, the ISOFIX size category, determined by a letter from A to G , is indicated on the child
seat next to the ISOFIX logo.
IUF: seat suitable for the installation of an I sofix U niversal seat, F orward facing secured using the
upper strap.
IL-SU: seat suitable for the installation of an I sofix S emi- U niversal seat either:
- rearward facing fitted with an upper strap or a support leg,
- forward facing fitted with a support leg,
- an infant car seat fitted with an upper strap or a support leg.
Weight of the child / indicative age
Less than 10 kg
(group 0)
Up to about
6 months
Less than 10 kg
(group 0)
Less than 13 kg
(group 0+)
Up to about 1 year
From 9 to 18 kg (group 1)
From about. 1 to 3 years
Type of ISOFIX child seat Infant car seat rearward facing rearward facing forward facing
ISOFIX size category F G C D E C D A B B1
1
st
row Front passenger seat Not ISOFIX
2
nd
row
Outer rear seats
IL-SU* IL-SU IL-SU IL-SU IL-SU
IUF
IL-SU
Centre rear seat Not ISOFIX
Remove and stow the head restraint before installing a child seat on a passenger seat.
Refit the head restraint once the child seat has been removed.
For more information on ISOFIX mountings
and the upper strap, refer to the corresponding
section.
The regulations on carrying children are
specific to each country. Refer to the legislation
in force in your country.
15C4C.A040
CANCELS AND REPLACES
* The ISOFIX infant car seat, secured on the lower rings of a vehicle ISOFIX seat, occupies
two rear seats.
5


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules
1

Forum

citroen-c4-cactus---2014
  • In guidance criteria. Is avoiding motorways off or on? Submitted on 8-6-2022 at 18:51

    Reply Report abuse


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Citroen C4 Cactus - 2014 at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Citroen C4 Cactus - 2014 in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 8,9 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Citroen C4 Cactus - 2014

Citroen C4 Cactus - 2014 User Manual - English - 331 pages

Citroen C4 Cactus - 2014 User Manual - German - 326 pages

Citroen C4 Cactus - 2014 User Manual - German - 331 pages

Citroen C4 Cactus - 2014 User Manual - Dutch - 331 pages

Citroen C4 Cactus - 2014 User Manual - Dutch - 326 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info